FCC ID: AZ492FT3826 Mobile 2-Way Radio

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILE O2 CONTROL HEAD USER GUIDE Draft 1 Draft 1 m ASTRO APX O2 Control Head Mobile Radio Quick Reference Card Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance

!

C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio (Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. Radio Controls LED Indicators Power Button Up & Down Buttons*

Emergency Button*

Radio On/Off Press the Power button to turn the radio on or off. Adjusting Volume If volume is set as the primary mode, 1 Turn the MFK clockwise to increase volume or counterclockwise to decrease the volume. If volume is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat step 1. Selecting a Zone If zone is set as the primary mode, 1 Turn the MFK until the display shows the desired zone and press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone. If zone is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat step 1. OR 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to scroll to Zone. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. 4 Rotate the MFK or D or U to the desired zone. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or the button (on the keypad mic.) to confirm the selected zone number. 6 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone. Multi-function Knob

(MFK)*

Selecting a Channel Home Button Dimmer Button Menu Select Buttons*

Accessory Port (Microphone)

*These controls/buttons are programmable. If channel is set as the primary mode, 1 Turn the MFK until the display shows the desired channel and press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed channel. If channel is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat step 1. OR MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2012 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 08/12 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, Illinois 60196, U.S.A. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to scroll to Chan. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. 4 Rotate the MFK or press D or U to the desired channel. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or the button (on the keypad mic.) to confirm the channel. 6 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed channel. Receiving and Transmitting 1 Take the microphone off the hook. 2 Select zone/channel. 3 Listen for a transmission. OR

> or < (on the keypad mic.) to Mon then press the Menu Select button directly below Mon and listen for activity. 4 Adjust volume, if necessary. 5 Press the PTT button to transmit; release to receive. Sending an Emergency Alarm 1 Press the Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller.

*PMLN6193A*

PMLN6193A English Draft 1 V O M K HOR . i j 3 Press and hold the emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) 1 Press Emergency button. 2 A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. OR A talk prohibited tone sounds when the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 Release the PTT to end the transmission. To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the Emergency button. Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm 1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 The display does not change; the LED does not light up, and there is no tone. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. k m l G n o The more stripes, the stronger the signal strength for the current site (trunking only). Direct radio-to-radio communication or communication through a repeater. On = Direct Off = Repeater This channel is being monitored. Voice muting the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected channel. On = Enabled Off = Disabled L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scanning a scan list. Blinking dot = Detects activity on the Priority-One Channel during scan. Steady dot = Detects activity on the Priority-

Two Channel during scan. Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode. Blinking = Program mode. Menu Navigation

< or > to Menu Entry

(on the keypad mic.). The vote scan feature is enabled. On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. On = Location feature enabled, and location signal available. Off = Location feature disabled. Blinking = Location feature enabled, but location signal unavailable. Inverted = User is currently associated with the radio. On = Packet data is activated. Off = Packet data is deactivated. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data activity is present. MFK is in Mode Change feature Turn the MFK to change channel. MFK is in Volume Change feature Turn the MFK to adjust the volume. g directly below Menu Entry to select. U or D to scroll through sub-list. H to exit. g directly below Menu Entry to select. Receiving a call or data. Display Status Icons u t F Transmitting a call or data. Received an Individual Call. English Draft 1 Declaration of Conformity This declaration is applicable to your radio only if your radio is labeled with the FCC logo shown below. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Address: Motorola Solutions, Inc., 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, IL60196, U.S.A. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

Model Name: APX Mobile conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y i English Draft 1 Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D ii English Draft 1 Additional FCC Notes to Users The following FCC information applies to Bluetooth radio options IC Model Name: PMHN4193A Description: O2 Bluetooth Option Board FCC ID: AZ492FT6002 IC: 109U-92FT6002 Conforms to the following regulations: FCC Part 15, Section 15.19, 15.12, and 15.105 Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Motorola may void the users authority, as authorized by the FCC, to operate this device and should not be made. See 47 CFR Part 15.21. Information to user.The users manual or instruction manual for an intentional or unintentional radiator shall caution the user that changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. See 47 CFR Part. 15.19(3). This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits of Part 15.15 of the FCC rules. Parties responsible for equipment compliance should note that the limits specified in this part will not prevent harmful interference under all circumstances. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. See Part 15.105b These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. D e c l a r a t i o n o f C o n f o r m i t y iii English Draft 1 However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Industry Canada (IC) Statements:

This Class B digital apparatus complies with ICES-003 and Radio Standards Specification (RSS) 210. y t i m r o f n o C f o n o i t a r a l c e D iv English Draft 1 Contents Declaration of Conformity . i Important Safety Information . ix Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance . ix Software Version . ix Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) . ix Informations importantes sur la scurit . x Scurit du produit et respect des lignes directrices concernant l'exposition l'nergie RF . x Version du logiciel . x Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) . x Computer Software Copyrights . xi Documentation Copyrights . xi Disclaimer . xi Getting Started . 1 How to Use This User Guide . 1 Notations Used in This Manual . 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . 2 Dynamic System Resilience (DSR) . 2 CrossTalk Prevention . 2 Encrypted Integrated Data (EID) . 2 SecureNet . 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . 3 C o n t e n t s Preparing Your Radio for Use . 3 Turning On the Radio . 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up . 4 Adjusting the Volume . 5 Identifying Radio Controls . 5 Radio Parts and Controls . 6 O2 Control Head and Microphone . 6 Programmable Features . 7 One Touch Button . 7 Assignable Radio Functions . 7 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . 9 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . 10 v English Draft 1 Using the Advance Programmable Buttons . 11 Using the Navigation Buttons . 11 Home Button . 12 Dimmer Button . 12 Multi-function Knob . 12 The MFK button on your radio is programmable to the following features : . 12 Using the Keypad . 14 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . 14 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . 15 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . 16 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . 17 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button . 18 Identifying Status Indicators . 18 Status Icons . 19 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . 21 Status Icons . 21 TMS Menu Options . 22 Call Type Icons . 23 LED Indicator . 24 Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED . 24 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . 25 Alert Tones . 26 s t n e t n o C vi English General Radio Operation . 31 Selecting a Zone . 31 Selecting a Radio Channel . 32 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call . 32 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call . 33 Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) . 33 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call . 34 Making a Radio Call . 35 Making a Talkgroup Call . 35 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) . 36 Making a Telephone Call . 37 Repeater or Direct Operation . 38 Monitoring Features . 38 Monitoring a Channel . 38 Conventional Mode Operation . 39 Advanced Features . 41 Advanced Call Features . 41 Calling a Phone Not in the List . 41 Receiving and Making a Selective Call

(Conventional Only) . 42 Receiving a Selective Call . 42 Making a Selective Call . 42 Draft 1 Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) . 43 Selecting a Talkgroup . 43 Sending a Status Call . 44 Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature

(Trunking Only) . 45 Requesting a Reprogram . 45 Classifying Regrouped Radios . 46 Contacts . 46 Making a Private Call from Contacts . 47 Adding a New Contact Entry . 48 Deleting a Contact Entry . 49 Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List . 50 Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List . 50 Editing an Entry Alias . 50 Editing as Entry ID . 51 Editing a Call Type . 52 Scan Lists . 52 Viewing a Scan List . 52 Editing the Scan List . 53 Changing the Scan List Status . 53 Viewing and Changing the Priority Status . 54 Scan . 54 Turning Scan On or Off . 54 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) . 55 C o n t e n t s Transmitting While the Scan is On . 55 Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan . 55 Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan . 56 Deleting a Nuisance Channel . 56 Restoring a Nuisance Channel . 56 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On . 57 Restoring Priorities in a Scan List . 57 Hang Up (HUB) . 57 Call Alert Paging . 58 Receiving a Call Alert Page . 58 Sending a Call Alert Page . 59 In-Call User Alert . 60 Emergency Operation . 60 Sending an Emergency Alarm . 61 Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only) . 61 Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call 61 Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm . 62 Special Considerations for Emergencies . 63 Automatic Registration Service (ARS) . 64 Selecting or Changing ARS Mode . 64 Accessing the User Login Feature . 65 Logging In as a User . 65 Logging Out . 66 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . 67 Accessing TMS Feature . 67 vii English Draft 1 Composing and Sending a New Text Message . 68 Sending a Quick Text Message . 69 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features . 71 Appending or Removing a Priority Status to a Text Message . 71 Appending or Removing a Request Reply to a Text Message . 71 Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message . 71 Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message . 72 Managing Text Messages . 72 Receiving a Text Message . 72 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox . 73 Replying to a Received Text Message . 74 Accessing the Drafts Folder . 75 Managing Sent Text Messages . 75 Viewing a Sent Text Message . 75 Sending a Sent Text Message . 76 Deleting Text Messages . 77 Secure Operations . 77 Managing Encryption . 77 Loading a Single Encryption Key . 77 Loading the Group Encryption Keys . 78 Using the Multikey Feature . 78 Selecting an Encryption Key (Conventional Only) . 79 s t n e t n o C viii English Enabling Secure Transmission . 79 Accessing the Secure Feature . 79 Selecting a Keyset . 80 Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys . 80 Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey . 81 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page . 81 Hear Clear . 82 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . 82 Understanding the GPS Feature . 82 Enhancing GPS Performance . 83 The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS) . 83 Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature . 84 Saving a Waypoint . 85 Viewing a Saved Waypoint . 86 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint . 87 Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint . 87 Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint . 88 Deleting All Saved Waypoints . 89 Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint . 89 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode . 90 Trunking System Controls . 90 Using the Failsoft System . 90 Going Out-of-Range . 91 SmartZone . 91 Using Site Trunking Feature . 91 Draft 1 Locking and Unlocking a Site . 92 Viewing and Changing a Site . 92 Viewing the Current Site . 92 Changing the Current Site . 93 Trunked Announcement . 93 Initiating an Announcement . 94 Ignition Switch Options . 94 Blank . 94 Tx Inhibit . 94 PTT Tx Inhibit . 94 Required . 95 Soft Power Off . 95 Ignition Only Power Up . 95 Emergency Power Up . 95 Auto Power Off Timer . 96 Utilities . 96 Viewing Recent Calls List . 96 Selecting the Power Level . 97 Selecting a Radio Profile . 97 Controlling the Display Backlight . 98 Turning Keypad Tones On or Off . 98 Turning Voice Mute On or Off . 99 Using the Time-Out Timer . 99 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features . 100 Analog Options . 100 C o n t e n t s Digital Options . 100 Using the PL Defeat Feature . 101 Using the Digital PTT ID Feature . 101 Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only) 101 Accessing General Radio Information . 102 Accessing Radio Information . 102 Viewing IP Information . 103 Viewing Control Assignments . 103 Using Siren, PA and Light . 104 Using Keypad as Siren Type Selector . 104 Using Keypad as Light Type Selector . 104 Using the Public Address Button on the Keypad 104 Using the External Public Address Button on the Keypad . 105 Using Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights) 105 Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights . 105 Using Permanent Horn and Lights . 106 Changing the Selected Alarms . 106 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On . 107 Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms . 107 Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms . 107 Using the Voice Announcement . 108 Helpful Tips . 109 Accessories . 111 ix English Draft 1 Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range . 112 Special Channel Assignments . 112 Emergency Channel . 112 Non-Commercial Call Channel . 112 Operating Frequency Requirements . 113 Glossary . 115 Commercial Warranty and Service . 119 s t n e t n o C x English Draft 1 Important Safety Information Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance

!

C a u t i o n Before using this product, read the operating instructions for safe usage contained in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio. ATTENTION!

This radio is restricted to occupational use only to satisfy FCC RF energy exposure requirements. Before using this product, read the RF energy awareness information and operating instructions in the Product Safety and RF Exposure booklet enclosed with your radio

(Motorola Publication part number 6881095C99) to ensure compliance with RF energy exposure limits. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX Software Version All the features described in the following sections are supported by the radio's software version R08.05.00 or later. Accessing Radio Information on page 102 to determine your radio's software version. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported. Notice to Users (FCC and Industry Canada) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of the Industry Canada rules per the conditions listed below:

1 This device may not cause harmful interference. 2 This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 3 Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola, could void the user's authority to operate this equipment. I m p o r t a n t S a f e t y I n f o r m a t i o n ix English Draft 1 t i r u c s a l r u s s e t n a t r o p m i s n o i t a m r o f n I Informations importantes sur la scurit Scurit du produit et respect des lignes directrices concernant l'exposition l'nergie RF

!

Mise en garde Avant d'utiliser ce produit, lisez les directives d'utilisation scuritaire prsentes dans le livret Scurit du produit et exposition l'nergie RF accompagnant votre radio. ATTENTION!

Cette radio est rserve un usage professionnel seulement pour satisfaire les normes d'exposition l'nergie RF de la FCC. Avant d'utiliser ce produit, lisez l'information sur la sensibilisation l'nergie RF et les directives d'utilisation prsentes dans le livret Scurit du produit et exposition l'nergie RF accompagnant votre radio (publication de Motorola, numro d'article 6881095C99) pour assurer le respect des limites d'exposition l'nergie RF. Pour obtenir une liste d'antennes et d'autres accessoires approuvs par Motorola, consultez le site Web :

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX x English Version du logiciel Toutes les fonctionnalits dcrites dans les sections suivantes sont prises en charge par la version du logiciel R08.05.00 ou ultrieure de la radio. Vrifiez auprs de votre dtaillant ou de l'administrateur de systme pour obtenir des renseignements toutes les fonctionnalits prises en charge. Avis aux utilisateurs (FCC et Industrie Canada) Cet appareil est conforme la Partie 15 des rglements de la FCC et RSS 210 du rglement d'Industrie Canada selon les conditions numres ci-dessous:

1 Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer d'interfrences nuisibles. 2 Cet appareil doit accepter toute interfrence reue, y compris les interfrences qui peuvent perturber le fonctionnement. 3 Les changements ou les modifications apportes ce dispositif, non expressment approuves par Motorola, peuvent annuler le droit de l'utilisateur utiliser cet quipement. Draft 1 Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Documentation Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights, nor the rights of others. C o m p u t e r S o f t w a r e C o p y r i g h t s xi English Draft 1 Notes r e m i a l c s i D xii English Draft 1 Getting Started Take a moment to review the following:

How to Use This User Guide. page 1 Notations Used in This Manual . page 1 Additional Performance Enhancement . page 2 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You . page 3 How to Use This User Guide This User Guide covers the basic operation of the APX Mobile Radios. However, your dealer or system administrator may have customized your radio for your specific needs. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication, you will notice the use of WARNING, Caution, and Note. These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist, and the care that must be taken or observed.The following special notations identify certain items:

!

!

W A R N I N G

!

C a u t i o n An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in injury or death if not carefully observed. An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which may result in damage to the equipment if not carefully observed. G e t t i n g S t a r t e d Note:

An operational procedure, practice, or condition, etc., which is essential to emphasize. 1 English Draft 1 CrossTalk Prevention

This feature prevents crosstalk scenario from happening, especially when a wideband antenna is used. This feature allows the adjustment of the Trident Transmitting SSI clock rate in the radio to be varied from the Receiving Frequency. This subsequently reduced the possibilities of radio frequency interfering spurs and prevents the issues of crosstalk. Encrypted Integrated Data (EID)

EID provides security encryption and authentication of IV & D data bearer service communication between the radio and the Customer Enterprise Network. SecureNet

SecureNet allows user to perform secured communications on an Analog or Motorola Data Communication (MDC) channel. The MDC OTAR feature will allow users to perform OTAR activities on an MDC channel. Example Home button or H PHONE

>

Description Buttons and keys are shown in bold print or as an icon. Menu entries are shown similar to the way they appear on the radios display. This means Press the right side of the 4-way Navigation button. (Using keypad mic) Additional Performance Enhancement The following are some of the latest creations designed to enhance the security, quality and efficiency of APX mobile radios. Dynamic System Resilience (DSR)

DSR ensures the radio system is seamlessly switched to a backup master site dynamically in case of system failure. DSR also provides additional indication e.g. failure detection, fault recovery, and redundancy within the system to address to the user in need. Mechanisms related to the Integrated Voice and Data (IV & D) or data centric are all supported by DSR. d e t r a t S g n i t t e G 2 English Draft 1 What Your Dealer/System Administrator Can Tell You You can consult your dealer or system administrator about the following:

Is your radio preprogrammed with any preset conventional channels?

Which buttons have been programmed to access other features?

What optional accessories may suit your needs?

Preparing Your Radio for Use Turning On the Radio. page 4 Validating Compatibility During Power Up. page 4 Adjusting the Volume . page 5 P r e p a r i n g Y o u r R a d o f o r U s e i 3 English Draft 1 Turning On the Radio Power Button Press the Power Button briefly turn on the radio. After a short time, the red, yellow and green LEDs light up. The display then shows Zone and channel text, and menu items display on the screen. The backlight will turn on to the last selected dim level. Note: Pressing the Power Button before the LED lights up LEDs will be ignored. If Fail ##/## appears in the display, the radio will not function until the condition has been corrected. If Error ##/## appears, some non-critical data has been changed. If either of these displays appear, if the display goes blank, or if the unit appears to be locked up, see Helpful Tips on page 109 for more information. If the power-up test is unsuccessful, you see Error XX/YY (XX/YY is an alphanumeric code). Turn off the radio, check the battery, and turn the radio back on. If the radio fails the power-up test again, i e s U r o f o d a R r u o Y g n i r a p e r P 4 English record the Error XX/YY code and contact your dealer. If CH Mismatch appears, means that either the Control Head has been connected to an incompatible transceiver, or vice versa. If your radio does not power up, contact your dealer. To turn off the radio, press the Power Button after the LEDs light up. Validating Compatibility During Power Up

The radio validates and updates the software and hardware of your control head(s) during power up. Follow the procedure below when your radio runs this task. Procedure:

1 The display shows Maintenance mode remote device;

promptly followed by other maintenance statuses. 2 The display shows Update done please reset upon completion. OR The display shows Update failed please reset when it fails to update. 3 Press the Power Button to reset. The radio runs the usual power up operation if the software updates are complete. OR Draft 1 The radio runs the Maintenance Mode if the updates are not complete and repeat step 1. Note:

If Sw incomplete appears, use Flashport Recovery Tool to update the control heads before you power on the radio again. Adjusting the Volume To increase the volume, rotate the Multi-Function Knob (MFK) clockwise. The display shows volume bars and volume level when you change the volume. To decrease the volume, rotate the MFK counterclockwise. Multi-Function Knob Identifying Radio Controls Take a moment to review the following:

Radio Parts and Controls . page 6 O2 Control Head and Microphone . page 6 Programmable Features . page 7 Assignable Radio Functions. page 7 Assignable Settings or Utility Functions . page 9 Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions . page 10 Using the Menu Select Buttons . page 10 Using the Advance Programmable Buttons . page 11 Using the Navigation Buttons . page 11 Using the Keypad. page 14 Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode . page 14 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode . page 15 Keypad Characters Numeric Mode . page 16 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode . page 17 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button. page 18 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 5 English Draft 1 Radio Parts and Controls O2 Control Head and Microphone

LED Indicators Bluetooth Indicator**

Emergency Button*

Push-to-Talk

(PTT) Button Power Button Up & Down Buttons*

Accy No-Dot Button (Purple)*

Data Feature Button*

Home Button

(Microphone) Keypad Navigation Button

(Microphone) Cancel Button

() Okay/Select Button ()

*This button is programmable. Note:

The microphone is not part of a radio. It is an optional accessory. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 6 English Multi-function Knob

(MFK)*

Home Button Dimmer Button Menu Select Buttons*

Accessory Port (Microphone)

*These controls/buttons are programmable.

** Your radios hardware is Bluetooth ready. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more details of all the features supported Accy 1-Dot Button*

Accy 2-Dot Button*

Draft 1 Programmable Features Any reference in this manual to a control that is preprogrammed means that the control must be programmed by a dealer or a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software, in order to assign a feature to that control. The programmable buttons can be programmed as shortcuts to radio functions or preset channels/groups depending on the duration of a button press:

Press Pressing and releasing rapidly. Long press Pressing and holding for the programmed duration (between 0.25 seconds and 3.75 seconds). Hold down Keeping the button pressed. One Touch Button

Each of the four Menu Select buttons, the Emergency button and the three Accy buttons on the microphone are programmable buttons which can be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician to a default function which is activated upon a short press. Assignable Radio Functions

Auxiliary Switches back and forth between two radios that are attached to the same control head. Call Alert Allows the radio to function like a pager, or to verify if a radio is active on the system. Call Response Allows you to answer a private call or phone call. Channel Selects a channel. Contacts Selects the Contacts menu. Delete Deletes digit, or deletes a nuisance channel in Scan. Digital Vehicle Repeater System Toggles between the Digital Vehicle Repeater System (VRS) mode. Dynamic Priority (Conventional Only) Allows any channel in a scan list (except for the Priority-One channel) to temporarily replace the Priority-Two channel. Emergency Depending on the programming, initiates or cancels an emergency alarm or call. Information Displays the basic radio information, IP-related information, and buttons or switches control mapping. Intercom Enables users of multiple control heads to talk to each other via the control heads in a multi-control head setup. Internet Protocol Address Displays the Internet Protocol (IP) address, device name, and status of the radio. Location Determines the current location (latitude, longitude, time and date), and also the distance and bearing to another I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 7 English Draft 1 location. Or, turns the GPS functionality on or off for all locations. Message Enters the current message list. Monitor (Conventional Only) Monitors a selected channel for all radio traffic until function is disabled. Multiple Private Line (Conventional Only) Selects the Multiple Private Line lists. Nuisance Delete Temporarily removes an unwanted channel, except for priority channels or the designated transmit channel, from the scan list. The designated transmit channel refers to the users selected zone/channel combination from which scan is initiated. One Touch 1 4 Launches a specific feature with one single button-press. You can setup as much as four separately programmed buttons for four different features. Phone Allows you to make and receive calls similar to standard phone calls. Private Line Defeat Overrides any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that is preprogrammed to a channel. Private Call (Trunking Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. Radio Profiles Allows for easy access to a set of preprogrammed visual and audio settings of the radio. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 8 English Ext PA On/Off Toggles the audio routing between the connected public address (PA) loudspeaker amplifier and the radios internal public address (PA) system. Recent Calls Allows for easy access to the list of calls recently received or made. Rekey Request Notifies the dispatcher that you require a new encryption key. Repeater Access Button (RAB) (Conventional Only) Allows to manually send a repeater access codeword. Reprogram Request (Trunking Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Request-To-Talk (Conventional Only) Notifies the dispatcher that you want to send a voice call. Scan Toggles scan on or off. Scan List Programming Selects the scan list for editing. Secure/Clear Toggles secure transmission on or off. Select Selects the assigned list for editing. Selective Call (Conventional Only) Calls an assigned radio. Site Display (Trunking Only) Views the current site or enable a site search for SmartZone operation. Site Lock/Unlock (Trunking Only) Toggles between lock and unlock mode when using the SmartZone option. Draft 1 Site Search (Trunking Only) Performs site search for AMSS

(Automatic Multiple Site Select) or SmartZone operation. Status (Astro 25 Trunking Only) Sends data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Talkaround/Direct (Conventional Only) Toggles between using a repeater and communicating directly with another radio. Talkgroup (Conventional Only) Allows a call from an individual radio to a group of radios. Text Messaging Service (TMS) Selects the text messaging menu. TMS Quick Text Selects a predefined message. User Login Automatically registers with the server. Zone Down Toggles downward through the zones in the radio. Zone Select Allows selection from a list of zones. Zone Up Toggles upward through the zones in the radio. Assignable Settings or Utility Functions

Air Horn Toggles the external airhorn alert tone on or off. All Tones/Alerts Toggles all tones on or off. Channel Announcement Allows you to hear the Voice Announcement audio file that is assigned to the radios current channel/mode. Dimmer Changes the display brightness. External Radio Toggles external radio on or off. Front/Rear Switches one of two control heads to be active at one time. HiLo Toggles the Hilo Airhorn tones on or off. Backlight Toggles display backlight on or off. Horns/Lights Toggles horns and lights feature on or off. Keypad Mute Toggles the keypad tones on or off. Keypad Lock Locks the radios keypad, or even locks in the radios currently operating channel when the Mode Knob scrolls to other channels. Low Power Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Manual Toggles the manual tone on or off. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 9 English Draft 1 Public Address On/Off Toggles the radios internal public address (PA) system on or off. Siren Toggles external siren alert tone on or off. Speaker Activates external speaker to share your call with your group. Squelch Toggles squelch level between normal open and tight. TX Power Level Toggles transmit power level between high and low. Voice Announcement Audibly indicates the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. Voice Mute Toggles voice mute on or off for the channels which have enabled In-Call User Alert. When Voice Mute is active, the radio remains muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. Volume Set Tone Adjusts the volume of the speakers, or adjusts the volume of the radios alert tones. Wail Toggles the external wail alert tone on or off. Yelp Toggles the external yelp alert tone on or off. Accessing the Preprogrammed Functions You can access various radio functions through one of the following ways:

A short or long press of the relevant programmable buttons. OR Use the Menu Select Button (g). Using the Menu Select Buttons

The Menu Select Buttons allow you to access the menu entries of features. Note: Check with your dealer or system administrator for the list of features activated in your radio. Your radio may be preprogrammed differently from the following example, but the steps for selecting a zone may appear as shown below:

Press the Menu Select button (g) directly below Zone. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 10 English Draft 1 Using the Advance Programmable Buttons

This feature is to help you to shorten the process of applying certain common features. Up & Down Buttons*

Emergency Button*

Menu Select Buttons*

Accy No-Dot Button

(Purple)*

Accy 1-Dot Button*

Accy 2-Dot Button*

* These programmable buttons support the One Touch Button feature.

(Quick Access) One Touch Button Enters a menu with a short press on the preprogrammed One Touch button. Features assigned to these buttons are Call, Call Alert, Phone, Repeater Access, MDC RTT Button Access, Status and Message. Using the Navigation Buttons

Your radio is equipped with navigation buttons. The navigation buttons will allow you to access the features in the radio. Up and Down Buttons

By default, the U and D buttons are used as up and down arrow input. These buttons are programmable. They can be programmed to navigate through zones, channels and to increase and decrease the volume of the radio. Right and Left Buttons

The > and < buttons mentioned throughout the manual can be found on the keypad microphone (keypad mic.). These buttons will allow you to navigate the lists in the radio. I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 11 English Draft 1 Home Button

Multi-function Knob The H button returns you to the home (default) display. In most cases, this is the current mode. The MFK button on your radio is programmable to the following features :

For selected radio features, the H button is also used to save user-edited radio settings or information before returning you to the Home screen. Note: Some features do not require you to press H to go to the Home screen. Refer to the individual feature sections in this manual for further details on saving user-edited radio settings or information. The H button also can revert to home channel from any other zone and mode in the radio. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Dimmer Button

Use this button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 12 English Mode Change to scroll the channel list.

- Press the MFK once and turn clockwise

-Turn the MFK clockwise or Volume Change counterclockwise to adjust the volume level of the speaker. The volume level can be adjusted in 16 steps or 32 steps. A fast turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 16 steps with large increments in volume level. A slow turn of the MFK adjusts the volume level in 32 steps with small increments in volume level. The display shows the volume level and bars to indicate the current level. The level of last selected volume when your radio powers down remains the same when the radio powers up. The main display shows the icon of the secondary feature.The main display does not show the icon of primary feature. Your radio by default is set to use the primary feature. Short press the MFK to toggle it to work on either the secondary or primary feature. The concentric ring LED on the MFK will blink in green when the knob is set to secondary feature. Draft 1 The secondary feature has an inactivity timer. This timer starts when the secondary feature is idle. The radio returns to primary feature when the timer expires. If the MFK is set to operate only one feature, it is recommended that it be set to Volume Change. Consult your dealer or system administrator for the best option available for MFK. Concentric Ring LED I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 13 English Draft 1 Using the Keypad You can use the 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad on the keypad microphone to access your radios features. The keypad functions in a manner similar to a standard telephone keypad when entering numeric digits. When the keypad is used to edit a list, each key can generate different characters of the alphabet. The tables below show the number of times a key needs to be pressed to generate the required character.

Keypad Characters Uppercase Mode 14

/

15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 7 Number of Times Key is Pressed 6 8

; @ _ 10

*

13

$

9

-

5

!

4

?

11

#

12

&

3

, C F I L O R V Y 2 Key 1 1 1

. 2 A B 3 D E 4 G H 5 J K 6 M N 7 P Q 8 T U 9 W X 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. S 8 Z 14 English Draft 1 Keypad Characters Lowercase Mode 14

/

7 Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 6

; @ _ 10

*

13

$

9

-

5

!

4

?

11

#

12

&

3

, c f i l o r v y 2

. b e h k n q u x 1 Key 1 1 2 a 3 d 4 g 5 j 6 m 7 p 8 t 9 w 0 Toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode.

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. s z 15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

) I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 15 English Draft 1 15

+

16

=

17

\

18 19 20

(

21

)

Keypad Characters Numeric Mode Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 6

; @ _ 10

*

12

&

13

$

11

#

9

-

7 14

/

5

!

3

, 2

. 4

?

1 Key 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Space

# Toggle between numeric and letter mode. l i s o r t n o C o d a R g n y f i t n e d i I 16 English Draft 1 Keypad Characters Hexadecimal Mode 3 2 B E A D 1 Key 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0

* Not applicable

# Not applicable Number of Times Key is Pressed 8 10 12 13 11 9 14 5 6 7 4 C F 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 I i d e n t i f y n g R a d o C o n t r o s i l 17 English Draft 1 Push-To-Talk (PTT) Button PTT Button The PTT button on the side of the microphone serves two basic purposes:

While a call is in progress, the PTT button allows the radio to transmit to other radios in the call. Press and hold down PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. The microphone is activated when the PTT button is pressed. While a call is not in progress, the PTT button is used to make a new call. See Making a Radio Call on page 35 for more information. Identifying Status Indicators Your radio indicates its operational status through the following:

Status Icons . page 19 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons . page 21 Status Icons . page 21 TMS Menu Options . page 22 LED Indicator . page 24 Intelligent Lighting Indicators . page 25 Alert Tones. page 26 s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 18 English Draft 1 Status Icons The liquid crystal display (LCD) of your radio shows the radio status, text entries, and menu entries. The following are the icons that appear on the radios display. u t F V N Receiving Radio is receiving a call or data. Transmitting Radio is transmitting a call or data. Call Received Radio has received an Individual Call. Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) The number of bars displayed represents the received signal strength for the current site, for trunking only. The more stripes in the icon, the stronger the signal. Direct On = Radio is currently configured for direct radio-to-radio communication (during conventional operation only). Off = Radio is connected with other radios through a repeater. M K Monitor (Carrier Squelch) Selected channel is being monitored (during conventional operation only). In-Call User Alert On = The feature is enabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected channel is activated. Off = The feature is disabled. Voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected channel is deactivated. H or . i j Power Level L = Radio is set at Low power. H = Radio is set at High power. Scan Radio is scanning a scan list. Priority Channel Scan Blinking dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-One. Steady dot = Radio detects activity on channel designated as Priority-Two. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 19 English Draft 1 View/Program Mode Radio is in the view or program mode. On steady = View mode Blinking = Program mode Vote Scan Enabled The vote scan feature is enabled. Secure Operation On = Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. AES Secure Operation On = AES Secure operation. Off = Clear operation. Blinking = Receiving an encrypted voice call. Location Signal On = Location feature is enabled, and location signal is available. Off = Location feature is disabled. Blinking = Location feature is enabled, but no location signal is available. n o

{

User Login Indicator (IP Packet Data) Inverted = User is currently associated with the radio. On = Packet data context activated. Off = Packet data context deactivated. Blinking = Device registration or user registration with the server failed due to an invalid username or pin. Data Activity Data activity is present. Hexadecimal Indicates that the text entry is currently in hexadecimal mode. MFK is in Mode Change feature Turn the MFK to change channel. MFK is in Volume Change feature Turn the MFK to adjust the volume. k m l G s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 20 English Draft 1 Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 67 for more information. Status Icons Inbox Full The Inbox is full.

The following icons appear on the radios display for TMS features:

,

[

Z r Message Sent The text message is sent successfully. Message Unsent The text message cannot be sent. Unread Message User receives a new message. The selected text message in the Inbox has not been read.

]

3/6 I P

;

p Read Message The selected text message in the Inbox has been read. Message Index Indicates the index of the current message the user is viewing. Example: If the user is looking at the third message out of a total of 6 messages in the Inbox folder, the icon is displayed as the icon on the left column. Priority Status The Priority feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority. Request Reply The Request Reply feature is toggled on before the message is sent. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Request Reply. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 21 English Draft 1 q 2 1 3

}

Priority Status and Request Reply User is composing a message with a priority status and a request for a reply. Messages in the Inbox folder are flagged with Priority and Request Reply. Numeric Indicates that the text entry is currently in numeric mode. Mixed Case Indicates that the text entry is currently in normal text mode. Uppercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in uppercase mode. Lowercase Indicates that the text entry is currently in lowercase mode. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 22 English

TMS Menu Options Menu Option Description/Function Back Edit Save Rply Del New Impt Rqrp Yes No Exit Optn Sel Send Brings you back to the previous menu screen. Edits a draft message or key in a target address. Saves the messages you have edited to the Draft folder. Replies to a message. Deletes a message or a character text during editing mode. Creates a new message. Toggles the Priority Status icon on or off for an outgoing message. Toggles Request Reply icon on or off for an outgoing message. Deletes all the messages in the current folder. Cancel the delete all messages options. Exits to the Home screen. Brings you to the Options main screen. Selects a predefined message or address. Sends the message. Draft 1 Call Type Icons The following icons appear on the radios main display, when you make or receive a call, or view selected call lists, to indicate the different call types associated with an alias or ID. Incoming call or data. Outgoing call or data. U

?

%

Radio number. Radio number added to a Call List. Mobile number. Mobile number added to a Call List. Landline phone number. Landline phone number added to a Call List. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 23 English Draft 1 Multi-function Knob - Concentric Ring LED The concentric ring LED blinks green when the MFK is using the secondary feature. See Multi-function Knob on page 12 to understand the functionality of MFK. If Intelligent Lighting is activated, the concentric ring LED will not blink green when the MFK is in the secondary mode. The LED turns into solid color of orange, red or green depending on the status of Intelligent Lighting. See Intelligent Lighting Indicators on page 25 for different status of Intelligent Lighting. Concentric Ring LED LED Indicator LED indicator shows the operational status of your radio. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I Solid red Radio is transmitting. Blinking red Radio is transmitting at low power condition. Double blinking red Radio is in Emergency Mode. Rapidly blinking red Radio has failed the self test upon powering up or encountered a fatal error. Solid yellow Channel is busy. Blinking yellow Radio is receiving a secured transmission. Solid green Radio is powering up, or is on a non-priority channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Blinking green Radio is receiving an individual or telephone call, or is on a Priority-Two channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. Rapidly blinking green Radio is on a Priority-One channel while in the Scan List Programming mode. 24 English Draft 1 Intelligent Lighting Indicators This feature temporarily changes the radios display backlight color and the alert text background color to help signal that a radio event has occurred. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Backlight Orange Event Emergency Alerts Red Critical Alerts Green Call Alerts When The radio initiates an emergency alarm or call. The radio receives an emergency alarm or call. The radio is out of range. The radio enters failsoft mode. The radio is unable to establish a full connection with the system. The radio is unable to authenticate or register with the system. The radio receives a private call. The radio receives a phone call. The radio receives a call alert. The radio receives a selective call. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 25 English Draft 1 Alert Tones An alert tone is a sound or group of sounds. Your radio uses alert tones to inform you of your radios conditions. The following table lists these tones and when they occur. You Hear Tone Name Heard Short, Low-Pitched Tone Long, Low-Pitched Tone Radio Self Test Fail Reject Time-Out Timer Warning No ACK Received Individual Call Warning Tone Time-Out Timer Timed Out When radio fails its power-up self test. When an unauthorized request is made. Four seconds before time out. When radio fails to receive an acknowledgment. When radio is in an individual call for greater than 6 seconds without any activity. When the Time-Out Timer has expired. Talk Prohibit/PTT Inhibit Out of Range Invalid Mode

(When PTT button is pressed) transmissions are not allowed.

(When PTT button is pressed) the radio is out of range of the system. When radio is on an unpreprogrammed channel. A Group of Low-Pitched Tones Busy When system is busy. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 26 English Draft 1 You Hear Medium-Pitched Short, Tone Medium-Pitched Long, Tone Tone Name Valid Key-Press Radio Self Test Pass Clear Voice Priority Channel Received Heard When correct key is pressed. When radio passes its power-up self test. At beginning of a non-coded communication. When activity on a priority channel is received. Emergency Alarm Entry When entering the emergency state. Central Echo Volume Set When central controller has received a request from a radio. When volume is changed on a quiet channel. Emergency Exit When exiting the emergency state. A Group of Medium-Pitched Tones Failsoft Automatic Call Back Talk Permit Keyfail When the trunking system fails. When voice channel is available from previous request.

(When PTT button is pressed) verifying system accepting transmissions. When encryption key has been lost. When status, emergency alarm, or reprogram request ACK is received. Console Acknowledge Received Individual Call When Call Alert or Private Call is received. Call Alert Sent Site Trunking When Call Alert is received by the target radio. When a SmartZone trunking system fails. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s 27 English Draft 1 You Hear Ringing Low-Pitched Gurgle Unique, Chirp Unique, High-Pitched Chirp Tone Name Fast Ringing Enhanced Call Sent Phone Call Received Dynamic Regrouping Heard When system is searching for target of Private Call. When waiting for target of Private Call to answer the call. When a land-to-mobile phone call is received.

(When the PTT button is pressed) a dynamic ID has been received. New Message When a new message is received. Priority Status When a priority message is received. s r o t a c d n i I s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i I 28 English Draft 1 You Hear Tone Name When Two high-pitched tones Four high-pitched tones every five seconds Single, high-pitched tone Private Conversation When a Private Call is received. Call Alert When a Call Alert page is received. Central Acknowledge When a Call Alert, emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is received by the systems central controller. Four high-pitched tones Mobile Unit Acknowledge When a Call Alert page is received by the intended unit, or the emergency System Busy alarm, reprogram request, or status/message transmission is acknowledged by the intended dispatcher. When the PTT button is pressed, indicates transmission fail because all system radio channels are in use. Release the PTT button and wait for call back. Automatic Call Back When a channel is now available for your previously requested transmission. Talk Permit (Optional) When the PTT button is pressed, indicates the system is accepting your Scan Alert On transmission. When Scan feature is activated through the preprogrammed button. I i d e n t i f y n g S t a t u s I i n d c a t o r s Sound similar to a telephone busy signal A series of two short, high-pitched tones A series of low-pitched tones followed by a series of high-pitched tones A series of high-pitched tones followed by a series of low-pitched tones Scan Alert Off When Scan feature is deactivated through the preprogrammed button. 29 English Draft 1 You Hear Continuous, low-pitched tone Tone Name Talk-Prohibit Smart PTT Inhibit Out-of-Range Illegal Mode s r o t a c d n i I Single, high-pitched tone every nine seconds Failsoft s u t a t S g n y f i t n e d i Brief low-pitched tone Time-Out Timer Warning or Menu Inactive Exit Single, short, high-pitched tone Valid Key Single, low-pitched tone Invalid Key I 30 English When

(When the PTT button is pressed) the system is out of service.

(When the PTT button is pressed) the channel is busy with the Smart PTT feature enabled.

(When the PTT button is pressed) indicates the radio is not in the range of the trunked radio system. When you have entered a mode where normal system traffic will be missed, or you are attempting something which is not permitted. Examples include: forgetting to exit the telephone interconnect mode after a call ends (fleet and subfleet calls cannot be received), attempting to transmit on a receive-only conventional mode, attempting to select a dynamic mode where no dynamic ID assignment has been made. When a trunked system central controller failure in an unmuted receive condition. The radio reverts from trunked operation to a system similar to conventional radio repeater operation. Other system users can be heard sharing the channel. When your present transmission will soon be disabled. When you pressed a valid key, or you entered a feature configuration state, or you are receiving or transmitting in the clear mode on secure models (with TX Clear Alert Tones enabled). When you tried to make an invalid key press, or that an emergency alarm, reprogram request, or status/message was not acknowledged. Draft 1 General Radio Operation Once you understand how your APX Mobile Radio is configured, you are ready to use your radio. Use this navigation guide to familiarize yourself with the basic Call features:

Selecting a Zone . page 31 Selecting a Radio Channel . page 32 Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call. page 32 Making a Radio Call . page 35 Repeater or Direct Operation . page 38 Monitoring Features. page 38 Selecting a Zone A zone is a group of channels. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use these features. Procedure:

If zone is set as the primary mode, 1 Turn the MFK until the display shows the desired zone and press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone. If zone is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat step 1. OR 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Zone. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Zone. The display shows the current zone. 4 Rotate the MFK or press U or D to the desired zone is displayed. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or the

button (on the keypad mic.) to confirm the selected zone number. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 31 English Draft 1 6 Press the PTT button to begin transmitting on the displayed zone. Selecting a Radio Channel A channel is a group of radio characteristics, such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs. Use the following procedure to select a channel. Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. If you select a channel that is not within the preprogrammed band, the radio indicates that it is on an unsupported frequency with both audio and visual warnings. Consult a qualified radio technician for the right choice between the following methods. Procedure:

If channel is set as the primary mode, 1 Turn the MFK until the display shows the desired channel and press PTT to begin transmitting on the displayed. If channel is not set as the primary mode, press the MFK once and repeat step 1. OR n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 32 English 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to scroll to Chan. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. The display shows the current channel. 4 Rotate the MFK or press U or D to the desired channel. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel or the button (on the keypad mic.) to confirm the channel. 6 Press the PTT button to transmit on the displayed channel. Receiving and Responding to a Radio Call Once you have selected the required channel and/or zone, you can proceed to receive and respond to calls. Red LED Yellow LED Green LED You see solid red while the radio is transmitting, and solid yellow when the radio is receiving a transmission (conventional mode only). There is no LED indication when the radio receives a transmission in trunking mode. If the radio is receiving a secure transmission, the LED blinks yellow. Draft 1 Receiving and Responding to a Talkgroup Call

To receive a call from a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

When you receive a talkgroup call (while on the Home screen), depending on how your radio is preprogrammed:

1 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid yellow. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID, and the caller alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The display shows the caller alias or ID. 2 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 3 Press the PTT button to respond to the call. The LED lights up solid red. 4 Release the PTT button to listen. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 35 for details on making a Talkgroup Call.

Receiving and Responding to a Private Call

(Trunking Only) A Private Call is a call from an individual radio to another individual radio. These one-to-one calls between two radios are not heard by others in the current talkgroup. The calling radio automatically verifies that the receiving radio is active on the system and can display the caller ID. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

When you receive a Private Call:

1 You hear two alert tones and the LED blinks green. The display shows Call received and the caller alias or ID. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp within 20 seconds after the call indicators begin. 3 During the call, the display shows the caller alias (name), if it is in the call list. OR During the call, the display shows the caller ID (number), if the callers name is not in the call list. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 33 English Draft 1 Receiving and Responding to a Telephone Call

This feature allows you to receive calls similar to standard phone calls from a landline phone. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

1 You hear a telephone-type ringing and the LED blinks green. The backlight of the screen turns green. The display shows Phone call and the call received icon blinks. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Resp. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 4 Press H or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to hang up and return to the Home screen. See Making a Telephone Call on page 37 for details. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 5 Press H to hang up and return to the Home screen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Resp, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Resp, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Private Call. See Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 36 for details on making a Private Call.If the system is busy when you attempt to answer the n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 34 English Draft 1 Making a Radio Call You can select a zone, channel, subscriber ID, or talkgroup by using:

The preprogrammed Zone switchmenu The Multi-function Knob A preprogrammed One Touch button The Contacts list (see Contacts on page 46). Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Talkgroup Call

To make a call to a group of users, your radio must be configured as part of that talkgroup. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Tgrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last-selected talkgroup. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR Rotate the MFK or U or D to select the channel with the desired talkgroup the press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 4 Press the PTT button to make the call. 5 ASTRO Conventional Only:

The LED lights up solid red. The display shows the talkgroup alias or ID. OR Trunking Only:

The LED lights up solid red. 6 Speak clearly into the microphone. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 35 English Draft 1 Making a Private Call (Trunking Only)

This feature allows you to send an individual Call Alert or page if there is no answer from the target radio. Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Enhanced Private Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. OR D or U to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to start the Private Call. 5 A telephone-type ringing sounds if the receiving unit is in service. The display shows Calling...<Number> or Calling...<Alias>. 6 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 7 When you are connected, the display shows the ID of the target radio. Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. OR If no acknowledgment is received, the display shows No acknowledge. OR If the target radio does not respond before the time out, the display shows No answer. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Sending a Call Alert Page on page 55 for more information. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 36 English Draft 1 4 Press and release the PTT button to dial the phone number. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 6 When your call is answered, press the PTT button to talk. 7 Release the PTT button to listen. 8 Press H to return to the Home screen. See Alert Tones on page 26 for more information if your call is NOT answered. Making a Telephone Call

This feature allows you to make calls similar to standard phone calls to a mobile or landline phone. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Phone Call button to dial the preprogrammed phone number and proceed to Step 5. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. The display shows the last transmitted phone number. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the first number of the call list. OR D or U to the required phone number. OR Use the keypad to enter the required phone number. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n 37 English Draft 1 Repeater or Direct Operation Monitoring Features The REPEATER operation increases the radios range by connecting with other radios through a repeater. The transmit and receive frequencies are different. The DIRECT or talkaround operation allows you to bypass the repeater and connect directly to another radio. The transmit and receive frequencies are the same. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Repeater/Direct switch to toggle between talkaround and repeater modes. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Dir. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Dir. 3 The display shows Repeater mode if the radio is currently in Repeater mode. OR The display shows Direct mode and the Talkaround icon if the radio is currently in Direct mode (during conventional operation only). You can repeat step 2 to toggle between the two modes. Once in Direct Mode, press PTT button to start conversation with the radios nearby. n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 38 English Radio users who switch from analog to digital radios often assume that the lack of static on a digital channel is an indication that the radio is not working properly. This is not the case. Digital technology quiets the transmission by removing the noise from the signal and allowing only the clear voice or data information to be heard. Monitor a channel to ensure the channel is clear before transmitting. Monitoring a Channel

Procedure:

Lift the microphone off hook. Conventional Modes Only:

1 Listen for activity on that channel. 2 Adjust the volume by rotating the MFK if necessary. 3 If you hear no activity, press and hold the PTT button to start your conversation. OR Draft 1 Trunked Modes Only:

1 Press the PTT button. 2 If you hear two, short, high-pitched tones, or if you hear no tone and the t indicator lights steadily, then proceed with your message. 3 Release the PTT button to receive (listen). If you are not in the range of the system, you may hear a continuous low-pitched tone and the display shows Out of range. OR 1 At Home mode where the default zone and channel are being displayed, > or < button (on the keypad mic.) to Mon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mon momentarily to activate monitoring. The display shows Monitor on. 3 Press the Menu Select button to deactivate the monitoring. The display shows Monitor off. Conventional Mode Operation

This feature allows you to monitor channel traffic on conventional channels by defeating the coded squelch. This way, you can listen to another user active on the channel. Thus, you may be prevented from talking over someone elses conversation. Note:

This feature must first be enabled by a qualified radio technician or system administrator. G e n e r a l i R a d o O p e r a t i o n Procedure:

Take the control head off hook. (This is the same as monitor on. You hear all channel traffic.) 39 English Draft 1 Notes n o i t a r e p O o d a R i l a r e n e G 40 English Draft 1 Advanced Features Use this navigation guide to learn more about advanced features available with your radio:

Advanced Call Features . page 41 Contacts . page 46 Scan Lists . page 52 Scan . page 54 Call Alert Paging . page 58 Emergency Operation . page 60 Automatic Registration Service (ARS). page 64 Text Messaging Service (TMS) . page 67 Secure Operations. page 77 The Global Positioning System (GPS) . page 82 Trunking System Controls . page 90 Ignition Switch Options . page 94 Utilities. page 96 Advanced Call Features Calling a Phone Not in the List

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Phon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Phon. 3 Enter the desired phone number from the optional keypad microphone. The display updates as the numbers are entered. 4 Press button (on the keypad mic.) to make the call. 5 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. 6 Press H or Menu Select button directly below Phon to exit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 41 English Draft 1 Receiving and Making a Selective Call

(Conventional Only) This feature allows you to receive a call from or to call a specific individual. It is intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations that are of no interest to you. Receiving a Selective Call

Procedure:

1 When you receive a Selective Call, you hear two alert tones and the LED lights up solid yellow. The call received icons blink and the display alternates between Call received and the home display. 2 The speaker unmutes. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. Release the PTT button to listen. Note:

If you press PTT button before pressing the Menu Select button directly below Call, your conversation will be heard by all members of the talk group. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 42 English If 20 seconds pass before you press the Menu Select button directly below the Call, you will not respond privately to the call just received. Instead, you initiate a Selective Call. See Making a Selective Call on page 42. Making a Selective Call

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Selective Call button to dial the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. The display shows the last transmitted or received ID. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to scroll through and select the required ID. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below List to go to the last number dialed. OR D or U to the required ID. OR Use the keypad to enter the required ID. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. Draft 1 5 Press and hold the PTT button to start the Selective Call. The display shows the ID of the target radio. 6 Release the PTT button to listen. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. If you do not press H button to hang up, your radio will remain in Selective Call state with the other unit. You will miss all subfleet traffic and incoming phone calls.

Using the Talkgroup Call Feature (Conventional Operation Only) This feature allows you to define a group of conventional system users so that they can share the use of a conventional channel. Note: Encryption keys are associated to talkgroups. When talkgroups are enabled, encryption keys are changed by changing the active talkgroup. See Secure Operations on page 77 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting a Talkgroup

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Tgrp. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Tgrp. The display shows the last talkgroup that was selected and stored. 3 U or D to Pset for the preset preprogrammed talkgroup. OR D or U to the required talkgroup. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the corresponding talkgroup in the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the currently selected talkgroup and return to the Home screen. 5 If the encryption key associated to the new talkgroup is erased, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the encryption key that is associated to the new talkgroup is not allowed, a momentary key fail tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. 6 Press H or the PTT button to exit. 43 English Draft 1 6 When the dispatcher acknowledges, four tones sound and the display shows Ack received. The radio returns to normal dispatch operation. OR If no acknowledgment is received, a low-pitched tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 7 Press H to return to the Home screen. No traffic is heard on trunked channels while Status Calls is selected. If the radio detects no Status Call activity for six seconds, an alert tone sounds until you press H or the PTT button. Sending a Status Call

This feature allows you to send data calls to the dispatcher about a predefined status. Each status can have up to a 14-character name. A maximum of eight status conditions is possible. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Status button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Sts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sts. 3 The display shows the last acknowledged status call, or the first status in the list. 4 D or U to the required status. OR Use the keypad to enter a number corresponding to the location in the status list. 5 Press the PTT button to send the status. The display shows Please wait. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 44 English Draft 1 Using the Dynamic Regrouping Feature (Trunking Only) This feature allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. This feature is typically used during special operations and is enabled by a qualified radio technician. You will not notice whether your radio has this feature enabled until a dynamic regrouping command is sent by the dispatcher. Note:

If you try to access a zone or channel that has been reserved by the dispatcher as a dynamically regrouped mode for other users, an invalid tone sounds. Procedure:

1 When your radio is dynamically regrouped, it automatically switches to the dynamically regrouped channel. A gurgle tone sounds and the display shows the dynamically regrouped channels name. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. Release PTT button to listen. When the dispatcher cancels dynamic regrouping, the radio automatically returns to the zone and channel that you were using before the radio was dynamically regrouped. Requesting a Reprogram

This feature lets you notify the dispatcher that you want a new dynamic regrouping assignment. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Reprogram Request button to send reprogram request to the dispatcher and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Rpgm. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rpgm to send reprogram request to the dispatcher. 3 The display shows Reprogram rqst and Please wait. 4 If you hear five beeps, the dispatcher has acknowledged the reprogram request. The display shows Ack received and the radio returns to the Home screen. OR If the dispatcher does not acknowledge the reprogram request within six seconds, a low-pitched alert tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. Try again or press H to cancel and return to the Home screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 45 English Draft 1 Classifying Regrouped Radios

The dispatcher can classify regrouped radios into either of two categories: Select Enabled or Select Disabled. Select-enabled radios are free to change to any available channel, including the dynamic-regrouping channel, once the user has selected the dynamic-regrouping position. Select-disabled radios cannot change channels while dynamically regrouped. The dispatcher has forced the radio to remain on the dynamic-regrouping channel. The Scan or Private Call feature cannot be selected while your radio is Select Disabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 46 English Contacts This feature provides address-book capabilities on your radio. Each entry corresponds to an alias (name) or ID (number) that you use to initiate a call. Contact entries are alphabetically sorted according to entry alias. Each alias can have up to 5 IDs of different call types associated with it. Additionally, each entry, depending on context (conventional, trunking, or phone), associates with one or more of the four types of calls: Phone Call, Selective Call, Private Call, or Call Alert. Each entry within Contacts displays the following information:

Call Alias (Name) Call ID (Number) Call Type (Icon) WACN ID (Astro 25 Trunking IDs only) System ID Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to add, edit, or delete the contact entries. Your radio also supports a maximum of 50 call lists. Each list can store up to 100 IDs (numbers). Draft 1 Note: Your radio is preprogrammed with a number of contacts per Call Lists. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Making a Private Call from Contacts

Note: Your radio must be preprogrammed to allow you to use this feature. Procedure:

Use the Options Menu. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts to the call list. The display shows Contact Alias. 3 D or U to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Call and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 D or U to select the call type. 7 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 8 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 9 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid green. 10 If there is no voice activity for a programmed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s OR Use the PTT button:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. 3 D or U to the required subscriber alias. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The display shows Contact Alias. 5 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.5 to 5.0 cm) from your mouth. 47 English Draft 1 6 Press the PTT button to initiate the call. During the call, the display shows the subscriber alias. 7 Press and hold the PTT button to talk. The LED lights up solid red. OR Release the PTT button to listen. The LED lights up solid yellow. 8 If there is no voice activity for a preprogrammed period of time, the call ends. OR The call ends when it reaches the maximum ring time. Adding a New Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to {New Contact} and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows Name. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. Use the keypad to enter the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the name. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 6 D or U to {Add Number} and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows Type 1

<Default Type>. 7 Press Menu Select button directly below Edit. 8 D or U to the required channel and press the Menu Select button directly below OK. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 48 English Draft 1 9 D or U to Number 1 and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. The display shows Number 1 and a cursor appears. Use the keypad to enter the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. 10 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have entered the number. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 11 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done once you have finished. 12 The display shows <Entry> stored, confirming that the contact entry has been added. 13 The radio returns to the main Contacts screen. Deleting a Contact Entry

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to the entry you want to delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. The display shows <Entry> confirm del?. 5 Select Yes to delete the entry. The display shows <Entry> deleted and the radio returns to the main screen for Contacts. OR Select No to return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 49 English Draft 1 Adding a Contact to a Call List or Phone List

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to the entry you want to add to the call list and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Add to calllst or Add to phonlst and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 D or U until the display shows {Available} and press the Menu Select button directly below Add to add as a new entry. OR D or U until the display shows <ENTRY> and its associated number and press the Menu Select button directly below RPLC to replace the existing entry. 6 The display shows <ENTRY> added, confirming the addition of the contact to the list. 7 The radio returns to the main display for Contacts. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 50 English

Editing a Contact in a Call List or a Phone List Editing an Entry Alias

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 D or U to the entry alias you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the name. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. Draft 1 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. Editing as Entry ID

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 D or U to the entry ID you wish to change and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 A cursor appears. Use the keypad to edit the number. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you have finished. The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 51 English Draft 1 Editing a Call Type

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Cnts. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Cnts. The entries are alphabetically sorted. 3 D or U to the entry you want to edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Edit and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 D or U to TYPE and press the Menu Select button directly below Edit. 6 D or U to choose from the list of call types given and press the Menu Select button directly below OK to select. 7 The display returns to the Edit Contact screen. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Done to save your changes and return to the main screen for Contacts. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Scan Lists Scan lists are created and assigned to individual channels/

groups. Your radio scans for voice activity by cycling through the channel/group sequence specified in the scan list for the current channel/group. Your radio supports different types of Scan Lists:

Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List Conventional Scan List Talkgroup Scan List A maximum of 200 Scan Lists can be programmed in your radio. These lists must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Viewing a Scan List

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to ScnL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. 3 D or U to view the members on the list. 4 Press the H to exit the current display and return to the Home screen. 52 English Draft 1 Editing the Scan List

This feature lets you change scan list members and priorities. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to ScnL. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below ScnL. The display shows the lists that can be changed. 3 D or U to the entry you want to edit. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to add and/

or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete the currently displayed channel from the scan list. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcl to view the next member of the scan list. 5 D or U to select more channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the keypad to go directly to additional channels to be added or deleted. OR Use the MFK to select additional channels to be added or deleted. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. See Viewing and Changing the Priority Status on page 54 for more information on how to add and/or change the priority of the currently displayed channel in the scan list. Changing the Scan List Status

Procedure:

1 Long press the preprogrammed Scan side button. 2 D or U to the member you want to edit. 3 Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel once to add the currently displayed channel to the scan list. OR Press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel, one or more times to change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 4 D or U to select more list members whose scan status you want to change. OR Use the keypad to go directly to that scan list member. OR Use the MFK to select another scan list member. 53 English Draft 1 5 Press H to exit scan list programming and return to the Home screen. Scan This feature allows you to monitor traffic on different channels by scanning a preprogrammed list of channels. Turning Scan On or Off

Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Scan button. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Scan. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan. 3 The display shows Scan off if scan is disabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to enable scan. OR The display shows Scan on and the scan status icon if scan is enabled. Press the Menu Select button directly below Scan to disable scan. 4 The radio returns to the Home screen. Viewing and Changing the Priority Status

Procedure:

1 Below the Sel, Del, and Rcl screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to view and/or change the priority status of the currently displayed channel. OR Below the Sel, Del, and Rcl screen, press the button or press the Menu Select button directly below Sel, one or more times to view and/or change the scan list status icon of the currently displayed channel. 2 A Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as a non-priority channel. The LED lights up solid green. OR A Priority-Two Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-Two channel. The LED blinks green. OR A Priority-One Channel Scan icon indicates that the current channel is in the scan list as the Priority-One channel. The LED rapidly blinks green. You hear all traffic on the Priority-

One channel, regardless of traffic on non-priority channels. OR No icon indicates that the current channel is deleted from the scan list. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 54 English Draft 1 Turning Scan On While Disregarding the Squelch Code (Conventional Channels Only) Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Mon. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mon. 3 The brief Monitor on display indicates that the radio is disregarding the squelch code. While scanning for activity, you can still receive fleetwide, system-wide, dynamic regrouping, incoming telephone interconnect and Private Conversation/Call Alert calls. Respond to these types of calls as you would normally on the selected channel. However, when scanning different channels while in talkgroup scan, incoming Private Conversation/Call Alert calls may be missed.

Transmitting While the Scan is On Radio Programmed for Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button to transmit on the channel indicated by the display. The radio does not begin scanning again for a predetermined hang time after you release the PTT button, allowing the other party to respond. If the other party responds within the hang time, scanning does not resume until the full hang time expires after they have finished speaking, allowing the conversation to be completed. To transmit on the selected channel if another channel is active, first turn scan off by pressing the Menu Select button below Scan momentarily. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 55 English Draft 1 Restoring a Nuisance Channel

Procedure:

To restore the deleted nuisance channel, do one of the following:

Turn scan off, then on. OR Change modes. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Nuisance mode delete can be disabled by the system administrator. Radio Programmed for Non-Talkback Scan

Procedure:

1 Press the PTT button at any time to transmit on the selected channel or fixed channel. To make a Call Alert page, or Private Conversation call while scanning, press either the Menu Select button directly below Page or Call. The call is entered on the selected channel and scanning is halted until the call is exited by pressing H or pressing the Menu Select button below either Page or Call. Deleting a Nuisance Channel

If a channel continually generates unwanted calls or noise

(termed a nuisance channel), you can temporarily remove the unwanted channel from the scan list. This capability does not apply to priority channels or the designated transmit channel. Procedure:

1 When the radio is locked onto the channel to be deleted,

> or < (on the keypad mic.) to Nuis. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Nuis. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 56 English Draft 1 Changing Priorities Status While Scan is On

While the radio is scanning, the dynamic priority change feature allows you to temporarily change any channel in a scan list

(except for the Priority-One channel) to the Priority-Two channel. This change remains in effect until scan is turned off. Scan then reverts to the preprogrammed (original) setting. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Dynp to change the priority of a non-priority channel in the scan list to Priority-Two. 2 Press H momentarily to exit the scan list and resume scanning. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Restoring Priorities in a Scan List

Procedure:

To restore the original channel priorities in a scan list, do one of the following:

Turn scan off, then on. OR Change channels. OR Turn off the radio, and then turn it back on. Hang Up (HUB)

To temporarily suspend Scan Mode operation, remove the control head from the Hang Up Box (HUB). You are allowed to use the control head while scan is suspended. However, Priority Member scanning is not suspended. This feature applies to all Scan Lists and Scan Types. Scan is resumed once the control head is returned to the holding clip and the preprogrammed hang time has elapsed. Note: Priority Scan List members are continuously scanned only when the Scan List, Designated Tx Member field is set to Talkback in the radio programming. Otherwise, all scan mode operation is suspended. 57 English Draft 1 Receiving a Call Alert Page

Procedure:

When you receive a Call Alert page 1 You hear four repeating alert tone and the green LED blinks. OR You hear one alert tone and the green LED blinks if Call Alert Tone Auto Reset is enabled. 2 The call received icons blinks and the display shows Page received. 3 Press the PTT button to answer. OR Press any button to clear the Call Alert page. See Making a Talkgroup Call on page 35 or Making a Private Call (Trunking Only) on page 36 for more information. Call Alert Paging This feature allows your radio to work like a pager. Even if other users are away from their radios, or if they are unable to hear their radios, you can send them an individual Call Alert page. You can also verify if a radio is active on the system. Depending on how your radio is programmed, when you make an Enhanced Private Call, the radio either automatically sends a Call Alert page if there is no answer after the maximum ring time, OR when you press the PTT button. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 58 English Draft 1 Sending a Call Alert Page

Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Access (One-Touch) Call Alert Paging button to send a page to the preprogrammed ID and proceed to Step 5 of the procedure below. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Page. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Page. 3 D or U to select the required ID. 4 Press the PTT button to send the page. 5 The display shows Paging...<Number> or <Alias>. 6 If the call alert page is sent successfully, four highpitch tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 7 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Call. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call. 3 D or U to select the required ID, press the PTT button to initiate the call. 4 If the target radio does not respond after a preprogrammed period of time, the display shows Send page?. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to send the call alert page. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to exit the screen without sending the call alert page. 6 The display shows Paging...<Alias>. 7 If the call alert page is sent successfully, a tone sounds and the display shows Ack received. OR If the call alert page is not acknowledged, a low tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. 59 English Draft 1 8 The radio returns to the Home screen. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below OK to return to the main screen for Contacts. In-Call User Alert

You can enable and disable voice transmission, if needed. Procedure:

1 Make sure you are in Home mode where the default zone and mode are being displayed. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to scroll to the Vmut. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Vmut. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Vmut or the VMut preprogrammed button again to turn the feature off and you will be able to hear to normal dispatch calls. Pressing the Menu Select button directly below Vmut or the VMut programmed button momentarily toggles between Voice mute on and Voice mute off. Voice mute on shown on the display indicates that the radio is muted to all conventional dispatch calls and affiliated trunking group calls. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 60 English Emergency Operation The Emergency feature is used to indicate a critical situation. If the Orange button is preprogrammed to send an emergency signal, this signal overrides any other communication over the selected channel. Your radio supports 5 Emergency modes:

Emergency Call Emergency Alarm Emergency Alarm with Call Silent Emergency Alarm Special Considerations for Emergencies Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information on the programming of this feature. Only one of the Emergency modes above can be assigned to the preprogrammed Emergency button or the Emergency footswitch. Note:

To exit emergency at any time, press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button for about a second. Draft 1 Sending an Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send a data transmission, which identifies the radio sending the emergency, to the dispatcher. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button. A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. 2 A dispatcher acknowledgment Ack received display follows. AND, Trunking Only:

A high-pitched tone indicates that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. 3 Press and hold the emergency button or the PTT button to return to normal operation. Sending an Emergency Call (Trunking Only)

Procedure:

1 Press preprogrammed Emergency button. 2 A tone sounds and the display alternates Emergency and the home display. OR A short low-pitched tone sounds when the selected channel does not support emergency. 3 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 4 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 5 Release the PTT to end the transmission. 6 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button until a tone sounds to exit Emergency mode.

Sending an Emergency Alarm with Emergency Call This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio. Upon acknowledgement, both radios can communicate over a preprogrammed Emergency channel. If the radio has both emergency call and alarm features enabled, it automatically proceeds to the call mode after the alarm is acknowledged. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the emergency call/alarm feature. 2 The display alternates Emergency and the home display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 61 English Draft 1 3 A high-pitched tone sounds, indicating that the alarm has been received by the trunked systems central controller. A dispatcher acknowledgment (four high-pitched tones) follows, accompanied by an Ack received display. 4 Hold the microphone vertically 1 to 2 inches (2.0 to 2.5 cm) from your mouth. 5 Press and hold the PTT button. Speak clearly into the microphone. 6 Release the PTT to end the transmission. 7 Press and hold the preprogrammed Emergency button until a tone sounds to exit Emergency mode. Turning the radio off also cancels the emergency state. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 62 English Sending a Silent Emergency Alarm

This feature allows you to send an Emergency Alarm to another radio without any audio or visual indicator. Upon acknowledgement, your radios microphone is automatically activated, allowing you to communicate with the other radio without pressing the PTT button. This activated microphone state is also known as hot mic. Note:

If you press the PTT button during hot mic, and continue to press it after the hot mic duration expires, the radio continues to transmit until you release the PTT button. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Emergency button to activate the silent alarm feature. 2 Press and hold the emergency button until a tone sounds to exit the silent alarm mode. If silent emergency alarm is used with emergency call, pressing the PTT button exits the silent mode and initiates the emergency call. Draft 1 Special Considerations for Emergencies

If you press the emergency button while in a channel that has no emergency capability, a low-pitched tone sounds. If the unit is out of the range of the system and/or the emergency alarm is not acknowledged, a tone sounds and the display shows No acknowledge. If you press the emergency button, then change to a mode that has no emergency capability, the display shows No Emergency and a continuous low-pitched tone sounds until a valid emergency mode is selected or until the emergency is cancelled. When an emergency is active, changing to another mode where emergency is enabled (trunked or conventional) causes an emergency alarm and/or emergency call to be active on the new mode. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 63 English Draft 1 Selecting or Changing ARS Mode

Procedure:

1 After the zone you want is displayed, toggle until the display shows the required channel. OR Press and hold > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Chan. Press the Menu Select button directly below Chan. The display shows the current zone is not blinking, and the channel is blinking. 2 D or U or press the MFK once and rotate the MFK to the desired channel. 3 In ARS Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS server channel. OR In ARS Non-Server Mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the zone, and ARS non-server channel. OR If the channel or mode selected is unprogrammed, the display shows Unprogrammed. Repeat Step 2. 4 Press H to confirm the displayed zone and channel. Advanced FeaturesAutomatic Registration Service (ARS) This feature provides an automated data application registration for the radio. When you turn on the radio, the device automatically registers with the server. Data applications within the fixed network can determine the presence of a device on the system and send data to the device. For example: Text Messaging Service (TMS). The Automatic Registration Service for the radio consists of two

(2) modes:

ARS Server Mode (default mode) ARS Non Server Mode Note:

The default ARS mode can be changed by a qualified radio technician using the radios programming software. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 64 English Draft 1 Accessing the User Login Feature

This feature allows you as the user to be associated with the radio. With this association, every data application (Example:

Text Messaging Service) takes on a friendly username. You can still send text messages without logging in as a user. The user login feature only enables the recipient of your message to identify you as the sender by assigning a username to your message. Note: Valid characters for a username entry are capital letters

(A Z), small letters (a z), numbers (0 9), symbols

(*, #, -, /), and the space character. The maximum length for a username is eight (8) characters. Usernames are not case sensitive in server mode but are case sensitive in non-server mode. A predefined username may sometimes be invalid because the programming software that is used to set predefined usernames allows you to set usernames comprising of eight (8) characters or more. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Logging In as a User

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to User. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below User. 3 The display shows the User Login screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below ID. 5 A blinking cursor appears beside ID. Use the keypad to enter a username using the keypad multi-tap function. OR D or U to scroll through the list of predefined usernames. Press the Menu Select button to select a predefined username. OR Press and hold D or U to scroll through the list of predefined usernames at a fast scroll rate. Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn to select a predefined username. 6 If the selected predefined username has more than eight (8) characters, or an invalid character in it, the display momentary shows Invalid ID. Repeat Step 5. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below PIN. 7 A blinking cursor appears beside PIN. Enter your Personal Identification Number (PIN) number. 65 English Draft 1 Logging Out

Once the data application registration is completed, you can log out. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Logt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logt. 3 Display shows the User Login Indicator icon and Clear private data?. 4 Select Yes to clear all your private data. The display shows momentary Private data cleared. OR Select No to keep your private data. Note: Private data refers to all messages in the text messaging Inbox, Draft and Sent folder. The next radio user will be able to access your Inbox, Draft and Sent messages if private data is not deleted. The maximum PIN length is 4 digits. The PIN number will appear as asterisks. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Logn. 9 In ARS server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, In progress and Cncl. OR In ARS non-server mode, the display shows the User Login Indicator icon, the ID, Logged in and Logt. In non-ARS enabled mode, the display shows Offline and Logt. 10 If the username is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat step 5. OR If the PIN is invalid, login fails and the user login failure indicator (IP indicator) icon blinks. The display also momentary shows Login failed. Repeat Step 7. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to cancel the login in progress screen and return to the initial user login screen. OR Wait for the logged in confirmation screen. If the login process is successful, the display shows the successful user login indicator (IP indicator) icon and Logged in and Logt. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 66 English Draft 1 Text Messaging Service (TMS) This feature allows you to send and receive text messages. The maximum length of characters for a text message is 200. There are three (3) types of text messages:

A new text message (free form message) A predefined message (quick text message) An edited quick text message The main menu consists of the following options:

Inbox Compose Drafts Sent Note: See Status Icons on page 21 for more details on the TMS icons and TMS Menu Options on page 22 for more details on each menu option. Accessing TMS Feature

Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the TMS feature screen. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS button to access the Inbox screen. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 D or U to scroll through the main menu options. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 67 English Draft 1 Composing and Sending a New Text Message

Note: During the uppercase and lowercase mode, multi-

tapping the keys only scrolls through the letters. For example, A->B->C, a->b->c. During the num lock mode, except for 1, pressing the keypad only enters the numeric digits. Subsequent presses of the same key inserts the same digit to the text message (no multi-tap). Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to f. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 D or U to Compose. Press the Menu Select button directly below Compose to see the compose options. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below New to compose a new message. 5 A blinking cursor appears on the Compose screen. Use the keypad to type or edit your message. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 68 English mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once the message is composed. 7 D or U to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send. OR D or U to Back and press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to Compose screen if you want to edit the message. 8 D or U to scroll through the address list and press the Menu Select button below Sel to select the required address. OR D or U to {Other recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Enter address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. Draft 1 9 Press the Menu Select button below Send to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 10 The display shows the Send message screen and Sending msg. 11 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 71 for more information. Note: You can also select the DRFT option to save your message in the Drafts folder to send it at a later time. See Accessing the Drafts Folder on page 75 for more details. Sending a Quick Text Message

Quick Text messages are messages that are predefined and usually consist of messages that are used most frequently. Each Quick Text message has a maximum length of 50 characters. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Quick Text button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 D or U tto Compose. Press the Menu Select button directly below Compose to access the compose options. 4 D or U to List. 5 D or U to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 6 The message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. Use the keypad to edit the message. Press < to move one space to the left. 69 English Draft 1 10 Press the Menu Select button below Send to send the message. OR Press the PTT button to send the message. 11 The display shows the screen and Sending msg. 12 If the message is sent, a tone sounds and the display shows Msg sent. OR If the message is not sent, a low tone sounds and the display shows Send failed. If the message fails to send, the radio returns you to the main TMS screen. Note: You can append a priority status and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 71 for more information. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 8 D or U to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to send the message. 9 D or U to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR D or U to {Other recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Enter address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 70 English Draft 1 Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features Before sending your message, you can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message.

Appending or Removing a Priority Status to a Text Message Note:

The Priority Message icon on a message does not imply that the message gets higher priority over the other messages when it is being transmitted. It is just an indication that can be embedded into a message to let the receiver know that the message is important. Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 68 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Impt. The priority status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Impt again. The priority status icon and the normal message icon disappear from the label bar.

Appending or Removing a Request Reply to a Text Message Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 68 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rqrp. The reply status icon appears beside the normal message icon on the label bar. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rqrp again. The reply status icon and the normal message icon disappear from the label bar.

Appending a Priority Status and a Reply Request to a Text Message A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Procedure:

After the outgoing message is composed (see Composing and Sending a New Text Message on page 68 for more information):

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 D or U to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to indicate the message as important. AND 71 English Draft 1 D or U to Rqrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Rqrp to request for a reply. 3 The priority status and reply status icons appear beside the normal message icon on the label bar.

Removing a Priority Status and a Reply Request from a Text Message When an outgoing message is indicated with priority status and reply status icons, follow the procedure below to remove these indicators. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Impt and press the Menu Select button directly below Impt to remove the priority status icon. AND D or U to Rqrp and press the Menu Select button directly below Rqrp to remove the reply status icon. 3 The priority status, reply status and normal message icons disappear from the label bar.

Managing Text Messages Receiving a Text Message

Note: When you receive a message that is flagged with the Request Reply icon, you must manually respond to the sender that you have received the message. The system will not automatically send back a notification that the radio has received such message. Procedure:

When you receive a message, press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox and go to Step3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 The new message icon appears and the display momentarily shows New msg. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the message. 3 The display shows alias or ID with the sender of the latest received message on top. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 72 English Draft 1 Viewing a Text Message from the Inbox

The Inbox can hold up to thirty (30) messages. Note: D or U to read the message if fills more than one screen. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Press and hold the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the Inbox screen and proceed to Step 4. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Inbox to view Inbox feature screen. 4 The display shows alias or IDs, with the sender of the latest received message. While on the review message screen, press the Menu Select button directly below Rply, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Rply to reply the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 67 for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 73 English Draft 1 Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn once you have finished writing the message. 7 D or U to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send the message. 8 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. Press the Menu Select button directly below Back at any time to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 71 for more information. Replying to a Received Text Message

Note:

The original date and time stamp, address and message content is automatically appended to the reply message. Procedure:

1 D or U to the required aliases or ID and press the Menu Select button below Sel to view the message. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rply to reply to a message. 3 D or U to NEW and press the Menu Select button directly below NEW. OR D or U to LIST and press the Menu Select button directly below LIST for a predefined message. OR D or U to scroll through the list of messages and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required message. 4 A blinking cursor appears on the screen. OR The predefined message appears on the Compose screen, with a blinking cursor at the end of it. 5 Use the keypad to type or edit your message. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Press < to move one space to the left. 74 English Draft 1 Accessing the Drafts Folder

This folder stores the messages that were saved previously. The Drafts folder can hold up to 10 messages. The oldest draft in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 D or U to DRFT and press the Menu Select button below DRFT. 4 The display shows the first draft message. Press the Menu Select button directly below Edit, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Edit to edit the message before sending it. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Managing Sent Text Messages

Once a message is sent to another radio, it is saved in the Sent folder. The most recent sent text message is always added to the top of the Sent list. The Sent folder is capable of storing a maximum of ten (10) last sent messages. When the folder is full, the oldest text message in the folder is deleted when the 11th message comes in. Viewing a Sent Text Message

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) on page 67 for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Data Feature button or the TMS Feature button to access the TMS feature screen, and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to TMS. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below TMS to access the TMS feature screen. 3 D or U to Sent and press the Menu Select button below Sent. 75 English Draft 1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn, Del, or Back to access the option. Select Optn to send to the message. Select Del to delete the message. Select Back to return to the previous screen. Note:

The icon at the top right corner of the screen indicates the status of the message. See Text Messaging Service (TMS) Icons on page 21 for more information. Sending a Sent Text Message

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn while viewing the message. 2 D or U to Send and press the Menu Select button directly below Send to send the message. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Send or the PTT button to send the message. 5 The display shows the Send Message screen and Sending msg. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous screen. Note: You can append a priority message and/or a request reply to your message. See Using the Priority Status and Request Reply Features on page 71 for more details. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 76 English 3 D or U to scroll through the address list and highlight the required address. OR D or U to {Other recpnt} and press the Menu Select button below Edit. A blinking cursor appears in the Enter address screen. Use the keypad to type the address entry. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Draft 1 Deleting Text Messages

Procedure:

From the Inbox, Draft, or Sent screen:

1 D or U to scroll through the messages. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Del to view the delete options. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Curr to delete the current message. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all the messages. Secure Operations Secure radio operation provides the highest commercially available level of voice security on both trunked and conventional channels. Unlike other forms of security, Motorola digital encryption provides signaling that makes it virtually impossible for others to decode any part of an encrypted message. Managing Encryption

Note: Refer to the Key-Variable Loader (KVL) manual for equipment connections and setup. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Loading a Single Encryption Key

Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. Upon attaching the KVL, the radio display shows Keyloading. 2 Press the Menu Select button below Target. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Load. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Key. 5 D or U to required key. 6 Press the Menu Select button below Load to load the key to your radio. 77 English Draft 1 7 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds a short tone for single-key radios. Loading the Group Encryption Keys

Procedure:

1 Attach the KVL to your radio. 2 Press the Menu Select button below Target. 3 Press the Menu Select button below Load. 4 Press the Menu Select button below Group. 5 D or U to required group. 6 Press the Menu Select button below Load to load the key to your radio. 7 Your mobile radio display shows Keyloading when it is loading key(s) from KVL. 8 When the key has been loaded successfully, the radio sounds an alternating tone for multikey radios. Using the Multikey Feature

This feature allows the radio to be equipped with different encryption keys and supports the DES-OFB algorithm. There are two types of multikey:

Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied

(strapped), on a one-per-channel basis, through Customer Programming Software. In addition, you can have operator-

selectable keys, operator-selectable keysets, and operator-

selectable key erasure. If talkgroups are enabled in conventional, then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups. Trunked Multikey If you use your radio for both conventional and trunked applications, you have to strap your encryption keys for trunking on a per-talkgroup or announcement-group basis. In addition, you may strap a different key to other features, such as dynamic regrouping, failsoft, or emergency talkgroup. You can have operator-

selectable key erasure. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 78 English Draft 1 Selecting an Encryption Key (Conventional Only)

Procedure:

Enabling Secure Transmission

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Key. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Key. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 D or U to scroll through the encryption keys. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected key and return to the Home screen. OR Press H, the PTT button, or the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit. Note:

If the selected key is erased, a momentary keyfail tone sounds and the display shows Key fail. OR If the selected key is not allowed, a momentary illegal key tone sounds and the display shows Illegal key. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Sec and press the Menu Select button directly below Sec. The display shows m and the current key if multi-key has been enabled. 2 Monitor the mode to be sure it is not in use. 3 Press PTT button to transmit. Note:

If the selected channel is preprogrammed for clear-only operation when you press the PTT button, an invalid mode tone sounds and the display shows Clear Tx only. The radio does not transmit until you disable the secure mode. Accessing the Secure Feature

Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Sec. 2 Press and hold the Menu Select button directly below Sec to display Secure feature screen. 3 The display shows the Secure screen. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 79 English Draft 1 Selecting a Keyset

This feature allows you to select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio. For example, you could have a group of three keys structured to one keyset, and another group of three different keys structured to another keyset; by changing keysets, you would automatically switch from one set of keys to the other. Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied now has the equivalent new key instead. Note: Press H, the PTT button, or the Exit menu selection to exit this menu at any time without changing the keyset selection. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Kset. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Kset. The display shows the last user-selected and stored keyset, and the available keyset menu selections. 3 D or U to scroll through the keysets. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired keyset. 5 The radio exits keyset selection and returns to the Home screen. Erasing the Selected Encryption Keys

This feature allows you to erase all or selected encryption keys. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Eras. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Eras. The display shows the last user-selected and stored encryption key, and the available menu selections. 3 D or U to the desired encryption key. OR Use the keypad to enter the number of the desired key. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below All to delete all keys. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Sngl to delete current shown key. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Abrt to abort this screen and return to Home screen. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to save the newly selected keyset. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 80 English Draft 1 MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) Page

This feature allows to view or define MDC Over-the-Air Rekeying (OTAR) features.It is applied only when operating in secure encrypted mode and only for conventional communications. In additional to Rekey Requests, OTAR transmissions include Delayed Acknowledgements, and Power-

up Acknowledgements. Some of the options selected may also need to be set up at the Key Management Controller (KMC) site to work properly. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Requesting an Over-the-Air Rekey

This feature, also known as OTAR, allows the dispatcher to reprogram the encryption keys in the radio remotely. The dispatcher performs the rekey operation upon receiving a rekey request from the user. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Reky. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Reky. 3 Press the PTT button to send the rekey request. OR Press the PTT button again, or the H or Emergency button, to exit the feature and transmit in normal mode. 4 If the rekey operation fails, a bad-key tone sounds and the display shows Rekey fail. Note:

The rekey operation failure indicates that your radio does not contain the Unique Shadow Key (USK). This key must be loaded into the radio with the key-variable loader (KVL) before the rekey request can be sent. Refer to your local key management supervisor for more information. 81 English Draft 1 Hear Clear

There are two components of Hear Clear. 1 Companding:

Reduces the channel noise, e.g. OTA transmission, that is predominantly present in UHF2 and 900 MHz channel with the following features. Compressor reduces the background noise flow and the speech signal at transmitting radio. Expander expands the speech while the noise flow remains the same at receiving radio. 2 Random FM Noise Canceller (Flutter Fighter):

Reduces the unwanted effects of random FM noise pulses caused by channel fading under high Signal-to-Noise (S/N) conditions such as in a moving in a transportation. The fading effects, heard as audio pops and clicks, are cancelled without affecting the desired audio signal. The Random FM Noise Canceller operates only in receive mode. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 82 English The Global Positioning System (GPS) This feature uses information from the Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your radio, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) varies depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are very difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. Understanding the GPS Feature

The GPS technology uses radio signals from earth orbiting satellites, to establish the location co-ordinates, maximizing your view of clear unobstructed sky is essential for optimum performance. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because you cannot establish a view of a wide area of the sky), the GPS feature of your radio will not work. Such situations include but are not limited to:

In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles Draft 1 Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your radio Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any emergency situation, always report your location to your dispatcher. Note: Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature only provides an approximate location, usually within 20 meters from your actual location, but sometimes further away. Keep in mind that the accuracy of the location information and the time it takes to obtain it varies depending upon circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from an adequate number of satellites. Note:

The satellites used by the GPS feature are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radio Navigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature on your radio. Enhancing GPS Performance

Sometimes, the GPS feature may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. You then see a message indicating that your radio cannot connect to enough visible satellites. To maximize the ability of your radio to determine a fix, please note the following guidelines:

For your initial fix, hold the radio in the face position. Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your radio and a large amount of open sky. The Outdoor Location Feature (Using GPS)

This feature allows you to determine your current location using a location menu, as well as your current distance and bearing in relation to another location. Radio location may be requested and reported over-the-air. Your radio stores up to a maximum of sixty (60) programmable location coordinates, also known as waypoints. When the memory is full, the next waypoints automatically replaces the oldest waypoints in the radio. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 83 English Draft 1 The radio also stores four (4) preprogrammed waypoints. These coordinates cannot be deleted. Programmable Waypoints User-configurable location coordinates. Only the alias is editable, not the coordinates. Coordinates can be deleted one at a time, or all at once. Preprogrammed Waypoints Fixed location coordinates:

Home Emergency Last Known Location Destination The Home and Destination coordinates are editable. Coordinates cannot be deleted. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 84 English Accessing the Outdoor Location Feature

Note: An ON menu key may be present on the location menu if it is preprogrammed by the dealer or system administrator. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Location off <Latitude>. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below On to turn on the GPS. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 4 U or D to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rfsh to obtain a new location fix. 6 The top line temporarily displays Please wait while the new location is being determined. While the new location is being determined, the location signal can be a solid or blinking icon. 7 Once the location coordinates are fixed, the display shows the current latitude. Toggle to see the longitude, time and date. The location coordinates are updated automatically every five seconds while the location signal is present. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. Draft 1 OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. OR Follow the procedure below to turn off the GPS (This feature is enabled by a qualified radio technician.):

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Loc. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Loc. The display shows Previous loc <Latitude>. 3 U or D to check the longitude, time and date of the last successful location fix. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Turn off GPS (if preprogrammed). 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to turn off the GPS. The display shows Location off. 7 Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the feature and return to the main screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. The radio also exits the menu if the emergency button is pressed. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Saving a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 U or D to Save as waypt and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. OR U or D to Save as home and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to Step 5. OR U or D to Save as dest. and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel and proceed to Step 5. 3 A blinking cursor appears in the screen. Use the keypad to type the alias via multi-tap. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. 85 English Draft 1 Viewing a Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Waypoints. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 D or U to desired waypoint. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. The display shows View. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 7 D or U again to view longitude, time and date the waypoint was detected. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to previous Waypoint screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. 5 The display shows Saved as <Waypoint name>. OR The display shows Saved as home. OR The display shows Saved as dest.. 6 Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 86 English Draft 1 Editing the Alias of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Waypoints. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 D or U to desired waypoints. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 6 D or U to Edit name and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit Name screen. Use the keypad to edit the alias. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. Press * to add a space. Press 0 to toggle between mixed case mode, uppercase mode, and lowercase mode. Press # to toggle between numeric and letter mode. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the Waypoints main screen. 9 The display shows <Waypoint Name> updated. 10 Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Editing the Coordinates of a Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 3 D or U to desired waypoints. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 5 D or U to Edit location and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 6 The first number blinks. Press < to move to the previous number/coordinates. Press > to move to the next number/coordinates. Press U or D to change the North (N), South (S), East (E) or West (W) direction. 87 English Draft 1 Press the Menu Select button below Edit to change the number/coordinates. 7 A blinking cursor appears in the Edit location screen. Press < to move one space to the left. Press > to move one space to the right. Press the Menu Select button below Del to delete any unwanted characters. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen. 9 Press the Menu Select button directly below OK once you are done with the new coordinates. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Cncl to return to the previous screen then skip to step 11. 10 The display shows {Home} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. OR The display shows {Destination} Updated and the radio returns to the Waypoints main screen. 11 Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 88 English Deleting a Single Saved Waypoint

Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Waypoints. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 D or U to desired waypoints. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Del and then skip to step 7. 6 D or U to Delete and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 7 The display shows <Waypoint Name> confirm del?. 8 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete. The display shows <Waypoint Name> deleted. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to previous Waypoint screen. 9 Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. Draft 1 Deleting All Saved Waypoints

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 D or U to desired waypoints and press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 4 D or U to Delete all and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 5 The display shows All saved wayp confirm del?. 6 Press the Menu Select button directly below Yes to delete. The display shows All saved wayp deleted. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below No to return to previous Waypoint screen. 7 Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu.

Measuring the Distance and Bearing from a Saved Waypoint Procedure:

While in the current location display:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Optn. 2 D or U to Dist frm here and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 3 D or U to the required waypoint, and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the distance and bearing from the current to the selected coordinates. 5 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to the previous Waypoint screen. OR Press H or the PTT button (if preprogrammed) to exit this menu. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 89 English Draft 1 Using the Location Feature While in Emergency Mode When the Emergency feature is activated by pressing the emergency button, the radio exits the Location menu and returns to the home (default) display so that you can see which channel the emergency signal is going out on. However, you may re-enter the Location menu while still in emergency mode, provided that Silent Emergency has not been activated. If you have turned Location off using the ON/OFF menu key, it automatically turns back on when Emergency is activated. If there is a solid location signal during Emergency, the current location and the location information received is saved as Emergency and Last Known Location waypoints, respectively. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 90 English Trunking System Controls Using the Failsoft System

The failsoft system ensures continuous radio communications during a trunked system failure. If a trunking system fails completely, the radio goes into failsoft operation and automatically switches to its failsoft channel. The failsoft condition is indicated by a faint beeping tone every nine seconds (radio unsquelched) until the trunking system returns to normal operation. To continue, in Failsoft, to communicate with other talkgroups, refer to the following procedure. Procedure:

1 Rotate the MFK to change to a different repeater frequency. 2 Press the PTT button to talk, and release the button to listen. When the trunking system returns to normal operation, your radio automatically leaves failsoft operation and returns to trunked operation. Draft 1 Going Out-of-Range

OUT OF RANGE when your radio goes out of the range of the system, it can no longer lock onto a control channel. Procedure:

1 A low-pitched tone sounds. AND/OR The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Out of range. 2 Your radio remains in this out-of-range condition until:

It locks onto a control channel. OR It locks onto a failsoft channel. OR It is turned off. SmartZone

The SmartZone feature extends communications beyond the reach of a single-trunked site (antenna location) when operating in a SmartZone system. SmartZone units provide expanded wide-area coverage. SmartZone automatically switches the radio to a different site when the current site signal becomes unacceptable. This usually happens when the vehicle in which the radio is located is driven out of the range of one site, and into the range of another. Under normal conditions, a SmartZone-enabled radio functions invisibly to the operator. However, the operator does have some manual controls on the Control Head the RSSI menu entry. This button can be used to check, or change, the SmartZone operation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Using Site Trunking Feature

If the zone controller loses communication with any site, that site reverts to site trunking. The display shows the currently selected zone/channel combination and Site trunking. Note: When this occurs, you can communicate only with other radios within your trunking site. 91 English Draft 1 Viewing and Changing a Site

This feature allows you to view the number of the current site or force your radio to change to a new one. Viewing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed Site Search button. OR

> or < (on the keypad mic.) to RSSI. 2 The display momentarily shows the name of the current site and its corresponding received signal strength indicator

(RSSI). Locking and Unlocking a Site

This feature allows your radio to lock onto a specific site and not roam among wide-area talkgroup sites. This feature should be used with caution, since it inhibits roaming to another site in a wide-area system. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Site Lock/Unlock button to toggle the lock state between locked and unlocked. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Site. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Site. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below Lock to lock the site. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Unlk to unlock the site. 4 The radio saves the new site lock state and returns to the Home screen. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 92 English Draft 1 Changing the Current Site

Procedure:

1 Press and hold down the preprogrammed Site Search button. OR Press and hold down the Menu Select button directly below RSSI. 2 A tone sounds and the display momentarily shows Scanning site. When the radio finds a new site, it returns to the Home screen. Trunked Announcement

The announcement capability allows you to make announcements to the entire user group, as well as monitor talkgroup calls and other announcements. Announcement calls are handled in two different ways, depending on the trunked central controller configuration. The two types are called ruthless and non-ruthless preemption. Ruthless Preemption:

When a ruthless preemption announcement call is initiated, the requesting radio begins transmitting immediately. All associated talkgroup calls taking place on other channels are immediately halted, and the radios are steered to the announcement call. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Transmitting radios continue to transmit until the PTT button is released, at which time they also unmute for the announcement call. Individual calls (Private Conversation and telephone interconnect) are not affected. Non-Ruthless Preemption:

When a non-ruthless preemption announcement is initiated, the initiating unit receives a telephone-type busy tone, followed by a call back when all associated talkgroup conversations end. Once an announcement call is pending, any attempts by other users to initiate a talkgroup call will result in a telephone-type busy tone. These users will not receive a call back until the announcement call is complete. 93 English Draft 1 Initiating an Announcement

If your radio has been programmed to allow announcement calls:

Procedure:

1 If channel is set as the primary mode, turn the MFK to locate the announcement-group mode. 2 Press the microphone PTT button to initiate the announcement. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 94 English Ignition Switch Options This feature allows the user to select the radios functionality based on the Ignition State of the radio users vehicle. The available options are as follows. Blank

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all transmissions are inhibited. This includes receiving any Trunking dispatch communications since the radio will not affiliate with the Trunking systems. PTT Tx Inhibit

This option allows the user to power on and power off the radio through the Power button regardless of the Ignitions current state. In addition, if the Ignition is not present, then all PTT button transmissions are inhibited. However, the radio is able to affiliate with the Trunking systems. Draft 1 Required

This option allows the user to power on the radio only if the Ignition is present. The radio can be powered off either through Power button press or when Ignition is lost. In addition, the radio automatically powers on when the Ignition is present only if the radio was turned off due to the ignition being removed. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Soft Power Off

This option allows the user to power on the radio either through Power button presses or when the Ignition is detected. Meanwhile, if the Power button was pressed or the Ignition was removed, the radio will be turned off. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Ignition Only Power Up

This option allows the user to power on the radio only when Ignition is detected and will power off when it is removed. The radio does not power on or off with the Power button press. This option allows the radio to power off when Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer expires, or, when Ignition Auto Power Off Timer expires. Note: While "Ignition" is not present, the radio powers-off with a radio-user Power Off button / knob selection if the radio was powered-up with an Emergency Power Up footswitch-press or Ignition Auto Power Off timer is running. While "Ignition" is present, the radio powers-on with a radio-user Power On button / knob selection only if the radio was powered-down with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer. Emergency Power Up

This feature allows the user to power on the radio and automatically transmits an emergency mode transmission on personalities with emergency enabled, with the use of a footswitch. In addition, when the Ignition Switch option is set to either Tx Inhibit or PTT Tx Inhibit, this feature will not be available to the users. Press the footswitch to turn on the radio and launch Emergency. A tone sounds and the display shows Emergency. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 95 English Draft 1 Auto Power Off Timer

Auto Power Off feature powers off the radio when no user actions occur during a preprogrammed length of time. There are two different versions of Auto Power Off:

Inactivity Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the radio is power-on. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. Ignition Auto Power Off Timer This timer begins once the vehicle key is removed, when the voltage at the ignition sense is removed. While the timer is active any user interaction with the radio resets the timer. When the vehicle key is reapplied, the voltage at the ignition is reconnected, this timer is stopped. Although both Inactivity Auto Power Off and Ignition Auto Power Off can be enabled together, Ignition Auto Power Off timer is mutually exclusive with Inactivity Auto Power Off timer when both are enabled. During the last two minutes of the timer countdown, the radio generates continuous low tone and blinks Powering off warning on the display until the timer expires or the timer is reset. The radio automatically powers off after the timer expires. The duration of the timer is preprogrammed. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 96 English Utilities Viewing Recent Calls List

This feature allows you to view the recent incoming and outgoing call information of the following call types:

Call Alert Selective Call Private Call Phone Call (Outgoing only) Note:

The radio can also be preprogrammed to log the radio IDs associated with incoming Dispatch Calls. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Rcnt. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Rcnt to access the Recent Calls feature screen. 3 D or U to scroll through the list. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to Home screen. OR Press H or the PTT button to return to the Home screen. Draft 1 If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. 3 The display shows Low power and the low power icon. OR The display shows High power and the high power icon. Selecting the Power Level

You can select the power level at which your radio transmits. The radio always turns on to the default setting. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. Settings:

Select Low for a shorter transmitting distance and to conserve power. Select High for a longer transmitting distance. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Transmit Power Level Switch to toggle transmit power level between high and low. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Pwr. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Pwr. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Selecting a Radio Profile

This feature allows you to manually switch the visual and audio settings of the radio. The display, backlight, alert tones, and audio settings are defined according to the preprogrammed radio settings of each radio profile. Please refer to a qualified technician for more information. Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit. Procedure:

Use the preprogrammed Profile button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Prfl. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Prfl to access the Profiles feature screen. 3 D or U to scroll through the menu selections. 4 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sel to select the required radio profile. 97 English Draft 1 OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Exit to exit the screen without making any changes. 5 The radio returns to the Home screen. The profile name on the Home screen indicates the current selected radio profile. Controlling the Display Backlight

You can enable or disable the radios display backlight as needed, if poor light conditions make the display difficult to read. Depending on how your radio is preprogrammed, you can also maintain a minimum backlight level on the radios display. Procedure:

Note: Press the Dimmer button to adjust the brightness of the display. Long press to toggle between day and night mode. Turning Keypad Tones On or Off

You can enable and disable keypad tones as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Keypad Mute button to turn the tones on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Mute. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Mute. 3 The display momentarily shows Tones off, indicating that the keypad tones are disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Tones on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the keypad tones are enabled. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 98 English Draft 1 Turning Voice Mute On or Off

You can enable and disable voice muting of the affiliated trunking talkgroup or selected conventional channel as needed. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Voice Mute button to turn the feature on or off. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to VMut. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below VMut. 3 The display momentarily shows Voice mute off, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is disabled. OR The display momentarily shows Voice mute on, and a short tone sounds, indicating that the feature is enabled. Using the Time-Out Timer

This feature turns off your radios transmitter. You cannot transmit longer than the preset timer setting. If you attempt to do so, the radio automatically stops your transmission, and you hear a talk-prohibit tone. The timer is defaulted at 60 seconds, but it can be preprogrammed from 3 to 120 seconds, in 15-second intervals, or it can be disabled entirely for each radio mode, by a qualified radio technician. Note: You will hear a brief, low-pitched, warning tone four seconds before the transmission times out. Procedure:

1 Hold down the PTT button longer than the preprogrammed time. You hear a short, low-pitched warning tone, the transmission is cut-off, and the LEDs goes out until you release the PTT button. 2 Release the PTT button. The LEDs relight and the timer resets. 3 Press the PTT button to re-transmit. The time-out timer restarts and the red LED lights up. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 99 English Draft 1 Using the Conventional Squelch Operation Features This feature filters out unwanted calls with low signal strength or channels that have a higher than normal background noise. 1 Procedure:

> or < (on the keypad mic.) to Sql. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Sql. The display shows Squelch XX, where XX is the value for the current squelch. 3 Press the Menu Select button directly below + to increase the squelch volume. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below - to decrease the squelch volume. 4 Press H to return to the selected channel. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 100 English Analog Options

Tone Private Line (PL), Digital Private-Line (DPL), and carrier squelch can be available (preprogrammed) per channel. Option Result Carrier squelch (C) You hear all traffic on a channel. The radio responds only to your messages. PL or DPL Digital Options

One or more of the following options may be preprogrammed in your radio. Consult your dealer or system administrator for more information. Result Option Digital You hear any digital traffic. Carrier-Operated Squelch (COS) Normal Squelch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code. Selective Switch You hear any digital traffic having the correct network access code and correct talkgroup. Draft 1 Using the PL Defeat Feature

This feature allows you to override any coded squelch (DPL or PL) that might be preprogrammed to a channel. The radio also unmutes to any digital activity on a digital channel. Procedure:

Place the preprogrammed PL Defeat switch in the PL Defeat position. You hear any activity on the channel. OR The radio is muted if no activity is present. Note: When this feature is active, the Carrier Squelch status indicator is displayed. Using the Digital PTT ID Feature

This feature allows you to the radio ID (number) of the radio from whom you are currently receiving a transmission. This ID, consisting up to a maximum of eight characters, can be viewed by both the receiving radio and the dispatcher. Your radios ID number is also automatically sent every time the PTT button is pressed. This is a per-channel feature. For digital voice transmissions, your radios ID is sent continuously during the voice message. Using the Smart PTT Feature (Conventional Only)

Smart PTT is a per-personality, programmable feature used in conventional radio systems to keep radio users from talking over other radio conversations. When smart PTT is enabled in your radio, you cannot transmit on an active channel. If you try to transmit on an active smart-PTT channel, you hear an alert tone, and the transmission is inhibited. The LED lights up solid yellow to indicate that the channel is busy. Three variations of smart PTT are available:

Mode Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Carrier Transmit Inhibit on Busy Channel with Wrong Squelch Code Description You cannot transmit if any traffic is detected on the channel. You cannot transmit on an active channel with a squelch code or (if secure-

equipped) encryption key other than your own. If the PL code is the same as yours, the transmission is not prevented. Quick-Key Override This feature can work in conjunction with either of the two above variations. You can override the transmit-inhibit state by quick-keying the radio. In other words, two PTT button presses within the preprogrammed time limit. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 101 English Draft 1 Model Number ESN Flash Code Tuning Version Serial Number Flash Size & Type RF Band Processor Version Note: Press H at any time to return to the Home screen. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 U or D to Radio info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 The display shows the Information screen. 5 D or U to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the home display.

Accessing General Radio Information Your radio contains information on the following:

Radio Information IP Display Control Assignments Note:

If the feature inactivity timer is enabled, your radio automatically exits the feature when your radio is left idle long enough for the time to expire. You will hear the Menu Inactive Exit Tone upon feature exit.

Accessing Radio Information This feature displays the following information of your radio:

s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A Host Version Secure Version CH 1 4 Version

(depending on the number of channels connected.) TIB Version TRC Version URC Version DVRS DSP Version (only when DVRS is available) 102 English DSP Version KG (Secure Algorithm) Serial Number MCHIB Version CHIB Version AUX CH Version Siren Version VRS Version DVRS App Version (only when DVRS is available) DVRS CP Version (only when DVRS is available) Draft 1 Viewing IP Information

This feature displays the device name, IP address, and status of your radio. Note:

The device name of your radio is preprogrammed. Check with your dealer or system administrator for more information. Procedure:

Press the preprogrammed Info button and proceed to Step 3. OR Follow the procedure below. 1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 D or U to Ip info and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 D or U to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. Viewing Control Assignments

This feature displays the programmable radio functions assigned to the controls of your radio for the currently selected channel. See Programmable Features on page 7 for more information on the various programmable features of your radio. Procedure:

1 > or < (on the keypad mic.) to Info. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below Info. 3 D or U to Control map and press the Menu Select button directly below Sel. 4 D or U to scroll through the various information. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below Back to return to previous screen. OR Press H to exit and return to the Home display. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 103 English Draft 1 Using Siren, PA and Light

Your radio supports siren and light via the keypad microphone. The keypad microphone can be preprogrammed to enable siren, public address and light. Using Keypad as Siren Type Selector

The keypad can be preprogrammed as different types of siren. Each button can be preprogrammed as a different siren tone. For example, pressing the preprogrammed button turns on the siren. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed siren button to turn on the siren. The display shows Siren on. 2 Press a different preprogrammed siren button to change the siren tone. OR Press the same preprogrammed button to turn off the siren. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 104 English Using Keypad as Light Type Selector

The keypad can be preprogrammed as different types of light. Each button can be preprogrammed as a different light. For example, pressing the preprogrammed button turns on the light. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed light button to turn on the light. 2 Press a different preprogrammed light button to change the light. OR Press the same preprogrammed button to turn off the light. Using the Public Address Button on the Keypad

The keypad can be preprogrammed to enable the radios internal public address (PA) system. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed public address button to turn on the public address feature. The display shows PA on. 2 Press the preprogrammed public address button to turn off the public address feature. When the internal public address and siren feature are turned on at the same time, the display shows Siren/PA on. Draft 1 Using the External Public Address Button on the Keypad The keypad can be preprogrammed to enable the radios external public address (PA) system. This button enables the external speaker to be able to transmit the radio user announcement publicly. Procedure:

1 Press the preprogrammed public address button to turn on the public address feature. The display shows Ext Rad on. 2 Press the preprogrammed public address button to turn off the public address feature. When the external public address and internal public address feature is turned on at the same time, the display shows Ext Rad/PA on. Using Optional External Alarms (Horn and Lights)

All control heads can be equipped for external alarms (horn and lights) that are activated when a Call Alert page, Private Conversation call, or phone call is received. The radio always powers up with the horn and lights feature enabled. Note:

The horn and lights feature must be enabled by a qualified radio technician. Using Non-Permanent Horn and Lights

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily. The last selected alarm(s) are enabled, and the display shows the enabled alarm(s) alternating with the selected mode, until it is turned off. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to turn off the alarm(s). The display shows Horn/Lites off. 105 English Draft 1 Changing the Selected Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L until the display shows the required alarm. 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below the required entry and the display exits to Home screen. Press the Menu Select button directly below the entry activates the option. Below are the selections available. Select H+L to turn on both horn and lights. The display shows Horn/Lites on. Select Lgts to turn on the lights. The display shows Lights on. Select Horn to turn on the horn. The display shows Horn on. An Off entry is shown at the softkey when one of the features above is active. Selecting the Off deactivates the current active alarm. Using Permanent Horn and Lights

If Permanent Horn and Lights is enabled, horn and lights will automatically be turned on when the radio powers up. Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L once to turn off the alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to enable the last selected alarm(s). The display briefly shows the enabled alarms, and then reverts back to the selected mode. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 106 English Draft 1 Receiving a Call While Alarms are Turned On

When you receive a call with the Alarms turned on:

Procedure:

1 You hear the vehicles horn sounds for four seconds, and/or the car lights turn on for 60 seconds. 2 The display shows the type of call received (Call, Page, or Phone) and the selected mode name. The time interval can be modified by a qualified radio technician. Turning Off Non-Rearmable External Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon will turn off the external alarm(s) and place you directly in that feature. OR Press the PTT button or any control-head button to turn off the external alarm(s). 2 Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume Knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarm(s). Turning Off Rearmable External Alarms

Procedure:

1 Press the Menu Select button directly below Call, Page or Phon to turn off the external alarm(s) and place you directly in that feature. The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. OR Press the PTT button or any control head button other than the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s). The external alarm(s) is turned off and automatically rearmed so that when you exit the entry, the external alarm(s) will automatically turn on. OR Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L to turn off the external alarm(s) and exit the Horn and Lights feature. Press the Menu Select button directly below H/L momentarily to rearm the horn and lights feature. The Volume knob and the Dimmer button have no effect on the state of the external alarms. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s 107 English Draft 1 Using the Voice Announcement

This feature enables the radio to audibly indicate the current feature mode, Zone or Channel the user has just assigned. This audio indicator can be customized per customer requirements. This is typically useful when the user is in a difficult condition to read the content shown on the display. Each voice announcement is within a limit of three seconds maximum. The sum total duration for all voice announcements in a radio shall be no more than 1000 seconds. Note:

This feature must be preprogrammed by a qualified radio technician. The features which Voice Announcement supports are:

Zone Channel Scan Monitor Talkaround/Direct Tx Inhibit Note: Voice announcements support certain number of zone-channel, but not all. The two options of priority for the Voice Announcement available are:

High enables the voice of the feature to announce even when the radio is receiving calls. Low disables the voice of the feature from announcing when the radio is receiving calls. Procedure:

You hear a voice announcement when the features below are preprogrammed in the radio. The radio powers up. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Press the preprogrammed voice announcement button

(which specifically programmed to playback the current zone and channel). The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Note: Pressing this preprogrammed playback button will always enable the voice feature to announce in High priority. All the three programmable buttons at the side of the radio support this feature. Seek advice from your dealer or qualified technician for the best selections for this feature. s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 108 English Draft 1 Change to a new zone. The radio announces the current zone and channel it is transmitting. Change to a new channel within the current zone. The radio announces the current channel. Press either the Menu Select button or preprogrammed button of the radio to launch or terminate Scan, Monitor, Talkaround/Direct or Transmit Inhibit. The radio announces the corresponding feature activation or deactivation. A d v a n c e d F e a t u r e s Helpful Tips The following are suggestions to assist you in troubleshooting possible operating problems.

!

C a u t i o n The cables that connect to the rear of the radio could have live voltage on some of their pins. Do not remove or reconnect these cables. Only a qualified radio technician should perform this task. Service performed by unauthorized personnel may cause the radio to transmit an emergency alarm even if the unit is turned off. If your radio is locked up or the display shows FAIL 01/09, turn the radio off and then back on. If this does not correct the condition, take the radio to a qualified radio technician for service. If radio operation is intermittent, check with other persons using the system for similar problems before taking the radio in for service. Similar problems indicate a system malfunction rather than a radio failure. If symptoms persist or, if your unit exhibits other problems, contact a qualified radio technician. 109 English Draft 1 Notes s e r u t a e F d e c n a v d A 110 English Draft 1 Accessories For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following website:

http://www.motorolasolutions.com/APX On the website, search for APX Mobile Radios. You will see the accessories information besides the specifications of the radio. You can also contact your dealer for details. A c c e s s o r i e s 111 English Draft 1 Appendix: Maritime Radio Use in the VHF Frequency Range Take a moment to review the following:

Special Channel Assignments. page 112 Operating Frequency Requirements. page 113 Special Channel Assignments Emergency Channel

If you are in imminent and grave danger at sea and require emergency assistance, use VHF Channel 16 to send a distress call to nearby vessels and the United States Coast Guard. Transmit the following information, in this order:

1 MAYDAY, MAYDAY, MAYDAY. 2 THIS IS _____________________, CALL SIGN __________. State the name of the vessel in distress 3 times, followed by the call sign or other identification of the vessel, stated 3 times. 3 Repeat MAYDAY and the name of the vessel. F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

:

x d n e p p A 112 English 4 WE ARE LOCATED AT _______________________. State the position of the vessel in distress, using any information that will help responders to locate you, e.g.:

latitude and longitude bearing (state whether you are using true or magnetic north) distance to a well-known landmark vessel course, speed or destination 5 State the nature of the distress. 6 Specify what kind of assistance you need. 7 State the number of persons on board and the number needing medical attention, if any. 8 Mention any other information that would be helpful to responders, such as type of vessel, vessel length and/or tonnage, hull color, etc. 9 OVER. 10 Wait for a response. 11 If you do not receive an immediate response, remain by the radio and repeat the transmission at intervals until you receive a response. Be prepared to follow any instructions given to you. Non-Commercial Call Channel

For non-commercial transmissions, such as fishing reports, rendezvous arrangements, repair scheduling, or berthing information, use VHF Channel 9. Draft 1 Operating Frequency Requirements Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) A radio designated for shipboard use must comply with Federal Communications Commission Rule Part 80 as follows:

on ships subject to Part II of Title III of the Communications Act, the radio must be capable of operating on the 156.800 MHz frequency on ships subject to the Safety Convention, the radio must be capable of operating:

in the simplex mode on the ship station transmitting frequencies specified in the 156.025 157.425 MHz frequency band, and in the semiduplex mode on the two frequency channels specified in the table below. Note: Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters. Additional information about operating requirements in the Maritime Services can be obtained from the full text of FCC Rule Part 80 and from the US Coast Guard. Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.050 Receive 160.650 Channel Number 1 Channel Number 2

*

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13**

14 15**

16 17**

18 19 20

*

22

*

Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.100 156.150 156.200 156.250 156.300 156.350 156.400 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 156.900 156.950 157.000 157.050 157.100 157.150 Receive 160.700 160.750 160.800 160.850 160.950 156.450 156.500 156.550 156.600 156.650 156.700 156.750 156.800 156.850 161.500 161.550 161.600 161.650 161.700 161.750 A p p e n d x

:

i M a r i t i m e R a d o U s e i i n t h e V H F 113 English Draft 1 Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Table A-1: VHF Marine Channel List (Continued) Frequency (MHz) Transmit 157.200 157.250 157.300 157.350 157.400 156.025 156.075 156.125 156.175 156.225 156.275 156.325 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.625 156.675 156.725

***

***

156.875 Receive 161.800 161.850 161.900 161.950 162.000 160.625 160.675 160.725 160.775 160.825 160.875 160.925 156.375 156.425 156.475 156.575 156.675 156.725

***

***

Channel Number 78 79 80

*

*

*

84 85 86 87 88 Frequency (MHz) Transmit 156.925 156.975 157.025 157.075 157.125 157.175 157.225 157.275 157.325 157.375 157.425 Receive 161.525 161.575 161.625 161.675 161.725 161.775 161.825 161.875 161.925 161.975 162.025

* Simplex channels 3, 21, 23, 61, 64, 81, 82, and 83 cannot be lawfully used by the general public in US waters.

** Low power (1 W) only

*** Guard band Note: A in the Receive column indicates that the channel is transmit only. F H V e h t n i i e s U o d a R e m i t i r a M i

:

x d n e p p A Channel Number 24 25 26 27 28 60

*

62 63

*

65 66 67**

68 69 71 72 73 74 75 76 77**

114 English Draft 1 Glossary This glossary is a list of specialized terms used in this manual. Term Definition ACK Active Channel A channel that has traffic on it. Acknowledgment of communication. Analog Signal ARS ASTRO 25 Trunking ASTRO Conventional Autoscan AUX CH Call Alert An RF signal that has a continuous nature rather than a pulsed or discrete nature. Automatic Registration Service Motorola standard for wireless digital trunked communications. Motorola standard for wireless digital conventional communications. A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list. Auxiliary Control Head Privately page an individual by sending an audible tone. Term Definition Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting

(turning on) a receivers audio circuit. A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise. A software-controlled, computer-driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it. It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters. A group of characteristics such as transmit/

receive frequency pairs, radio parameters, and encryption encoding. Control Head Interface Board In a trunking system, one of the channels that is used to provide a continuous, two-

way/data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system. Typically refers to radio-to-radio communications, sometimes through a repeater (see Trunking). A scan list that includes only conventional channels. Carrier Squelch Central Controller Channel CHIB Control Channel Conventional Conventional Scan List l G o s s a r y 115 English Draft 1 Term CP Cursor Deadlock Digital Private Line (DPL) Digital Signal Dispatcher DSP Dynamic Regrouping ESN Definition Term Definition Codeplug A visual tracking marker (a blinking line) that indicates a location on the display. Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio.The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt. A type of coded squelch using data bursts. Similar to PL except a digital code is used instead of a tone. An RF signal that has a pulsed, or discrete, nature, rather than a continuous nature. An individual who has radio system management duties. Digital Signal Processing A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other. Electrical Serial Number A feature that allows communications to take place even though the central controller has failed. Each trunked repeater in the system transmits a data word informing every radio that the system has gone into failsoft. Federal Communications Commission. Frequency Modulation Disconnect. The first display information after the radio completes its self test. Key-variable loader: A device for loading encryption keys into the radio. Liquid crystal display Light-emitting diode A software-activated feature shown at the bottom of the display selection of these features is controlled by the g. Millennium Control Head Board Failsoft FCC FM Hang Up Home screen KVL LCD LED Menu Entry MCHB y r a s s o G l 116 English Draft 1 Term Definition Monitor Multi-System Talkgroup Scan List Network Access Code Non-Tactical/

Revert OTAR Page Check channel activity through menu entries. If the channel is clear, you hear static. If the channel is in use, you hear conversation. It also serves as a way to check the volume level of the radio, since the radio opens the squelch when the monitor button is pressed. A scan list that can include both talkgroups

(trunked) and channels (conventional). Network Access Code (NAC) operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites. The user talks on a preprogrammed emergency channel. The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel. Over-the-air rekeying. A one-way alert, with audio and/or display messages. A set of unique features specific to a radio. Personal Identification Number Personality PIN Preprogrammed Refers to a software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician. l G o s s a r y Term Private

(Conversation) Call Private Line

(PL) Programmable PTT Radio Frequency (RF) Repeater Selective Call Definition A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the talkgroup. A sub-audible tone that is transmitted such that only receivers decoding the tone receives it. Refers to a radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it. Push-To-Talk the PTT button engages the transmitter and puts the radio in transmit (send) operation when pressed. The part of the general frequency spectrum between the audio and infrared light regions (about 10 kHz to 10,000,000 MHz). A conventional radio feature, where you talk through a receive/transmit facility that re-transmits received signals, in order to improve communications range and coverage. A feature that allows you to call a select individual, intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you. 117 English Draft 1 Term Definition Selective Switch Squelch Standby Status Calls Tactical/

Non-Revert Talkaround Talkgroup TMS Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup. Special electronic circuitry, added to the receiver of a radio, that reduces, or cuts off, unwanted signals before they are heard in the speaker. An operating condition whereby the radios speaker is muted but still continues to receive data. Pre-defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking. The user talks on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state. Bypass a repeater and talk directly to another unit for easy local unit-to-unit communications. An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communication path. Text Messaging Service y r a s s o G l 118 English Term Trunking Trunking Priority Monitor Scan List USK UTC Zone Definition The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users

(see Conventional). A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system. Unique Shadow Key Coordinated Universal Time. The international time standard (formerly Greenwich Mean Time, or GMT). Zero hours UTC is midnight in Greenwich, England, which is located at 0 degrees longitude. Everything east of Greenwich

(up to 180 degrees) is later in time;

everything west is earlier. There are 42 time authorities around the world that are constantly synchronizing with each other. Abbreviated as UTC (English backronym =

Universal Time, Coordinated), it is also known as Zulu (Z) Time. A grouping of channels. Draft 1 Commercial Warranty and Service Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS AND FOR HOW LONG:

MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below

(Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

APX Mobile Radio Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. GENERAL PROVISIONS:

This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAs option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 119 English Draft 1 INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. C)Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. III. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call MOTOROLA at 1-800-927-2744 US/Canada. V. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

A) Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C B) Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. 120 English D)Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E) A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassembles or repairs (including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with MOTOROLA's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F) Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G)Rechargeable batteries if:

any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H)Freight costs to the repair depot. I) A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J) Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K) Normal and customary wear and tear. Draft 1 VI. PATENT AND SOFTWARE PROVISIONS:

MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A) that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

B) that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C)should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAs opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. GOVERNING LAW:

This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, U.S.A. C o m m e r c i a l W a r r a n t y a n d S e r v i c e 121 English Draft 1 SERVICE Proper repair and maintenance procedures will assure efficient operation and long life for this product. A Motorola maintenance agreement will provide expert service to keep this and all other communication equipment in perfect operating condition. A nationwide service organization is provided by Motorola to support maintenance services. Through its maintenance and installation program, Motorola makes available the finest service to those desiring reliable, continuous communications on a contract basis. For a contract service agreement, please contact your nearest Motorola service or sales representative, or an authorized Motorola dealer. Express Service Plus (ESP) is an optional extended service coverage plan, which provides for the repair of this product for a period of three years from the date of shipment from the factory, or the date of delivery if purchased from an authorized Motorola two-

way radio dealer. For more information about ESP, contact the Motorola Radio Support Center, 2204 Galvin Drive, Elgin, IL 60123, 1-800-227-6772. e c i v r e S d n a y t n a r r a W l a i c r e m m o C 122 English Draft 1 Draft 1 Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. August 2012.

*68012006035*

68012006035-B Draft 1

 

 

APX TWO-WAY RADIOS APX MOBILES O2, O3, O5, O7 & O9 CONTROL HEAD INSTALLATION MANUAL 0 Foreword This manual covers the O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 models of the ASTRO APX mobile radios. It includes all the information necessary to install mid power and high power radios, and configure radio installation inside vehicles. For details on radio operation or component-level troubleshooting, refer to the applicable manuals available separately. A list of related publications is provided in the section Related Publications, on page vi. RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios See Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards, on page ii. Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in PMRs (Publication Manual Revisions). These PMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added, changed, and deleted items. 

To obtain PMRs, go to https://businessonline.motorola.com. Parts Ordering See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering for information on how to obtain replacement parts. For part numbers, refer to the ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual (Motorola publication part number 6875964M01). Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs, including, but not limited to, the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied, reproduced, modified, reverse-engineered, or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the normal non-exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola. No part of this manual may be reproduced, distributed, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose without the express written permission of Motorola. Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined, and is believed to be entirely reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies. Furthermore, Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability, function, or design. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein; nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2009 2012 by Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. i Installation Requirements for Compliance with Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards ATTENTION!

This radio is intended for use in occupational/controlled conditions, where users have full knowledge of their exposure and can exercise control over their exposure to meet FCC limits. This radio device is NOT authorized for general population, consumer, or any other use. To ensure compliance to RF Energy Safety Standards:

Install only Motorola approved antennas and accessories Be sure that antenna installation is per Antenna Installation, on page 2-38 of this manual Be sure that Product Safety and RF Safety Booklet enclosed with this radio is available to the end user upon completion of the installation of this radio Before using this product, read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations. For a list of Motorola-approved antennas and other accessories, visit the following web site which lists approved accessories for your radio model: http://www.motorolasolutions.com. ii Table of Contents iii Table of Contents Foreword..........................................................................................................i RF Energy Exposure and Product Safety Guide for Mobile Two-way Radios..............................................i Manual Revisions .........................................................................................................................................i Parts Ordering ..............................................................................................................................................i Computer Software Copyrights ....................................................................................................................i Document Copyrights...................................................................................................................................i Disclaimer.....................................................................................................................................................i Trademarks ..................................................................................................................................................i Installation Requirements for Compliance with

Radio Frequency (RF) Energy Exposure Safety Standards.......................ii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme..................................................xiii Commercial Warranty ..................................................................................xv Limited Warranty .......................................................................................................................................xv MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS...............................................................................xv I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long ....................................................................xv II. General Provisions................................................................................................................xv III. State Law Rights .................................................................................................................xvi IV. How To Get Warranty Service ............................................................................................xvi V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover...................................................................................xvi VI. Patent And Software Provisions ........................................................................................ xvii VII. Governing Law.................................................................................................................. xvii Chapter 1 Introduction ......................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Mobile Radio Description............................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Standard Configurations ................................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration ................................................................................................ 1-5 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration............................................................................................ 1-7 1.2.3 Multi Control Head .......................................................................................................... 1-13 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations ........................................................................................................... 1-14 1.4 Base/Control Stations .................................................................................................................. 1-14 1.5 Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations ............................................................................... 1-14 Chapter 2 Standard Configurations.................................................... 2-1 2.1 Planning the Installation................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations ....................................... 2-14 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation.......................... 2-14 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation...................... 2-15 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) ................................................................ 2-17 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming............................................................................. 2-18 2.1.4 2.1.5 6878215A01 iv Table of Contents 2.2.3 2.2 Radio Mounting ........................................................................................................................... 2-19 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion.......................................................................................... 2-23 2.2.2.1 100W Radios Only................................................................................................. 2-24 2.2.2.2 Remote Mount Control Head Installation............................................................... 2-24 2.2.2.3 Multiple Control Head Installation.......................................................................... 2-27 2.2.2.4 Cable Installation ................................................................................................... 2-29 2.2.2.5 Setting the Initial Control Head ID ......................................................................... 2-29 2.2.2.6 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling....................................................... 2-30 Locking Kit (Optional) ..................................................................................................... 2-32 2.2.3.1 All Radios Except 100W ........................................................................................ 2-32 2.2.3.2 100W Radios ......................................................................................................... 2-32 2.3 Power Cables (Transceiver and Control Head)........................................................................... 2-33 2.3.1 Optional Locking Feature for High Power Chassis Power Cables.................................. 2-33 2.3.2 O2, O5, O7 or O9 Control Head Power Cables.............................................................. 2-36 2.3.3 Battery Selector Switch................................................................................................... 2-37 2.4 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................... 2-38 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle........................................ 2-38 2.4.2 Mini-UHF Connection ..................................................................................................... 2-40 2.4.3 GPS Antenna Placement................................................................................................ 2-42 2.4.4 GPS Connection............................................................................................................. 2-42 2.5 Speaker ....................................................................................................................................... 2-43 Internal Speaker Disassembly........................................................................................ 2-44 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip ........................................................................................................... 2-46 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip .................................................................. 2-46 2.7 RFID (Option) .............................................................................................................................. 2-46 2.7.1 RFID Reading................................................................................................................. 2-48 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) ................................................................................... 2-51 2.8 Completing the Installation .......................................................................................................... 2-52 2.6.1 2.5.1 Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation ............................. 3-1 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting ............................................................................................. 3-1 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly ...................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Power Cable ..................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.2 Ground Cable ................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.3 Wires ................................................................................................................................ 3-4 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable........................................................................................................ 3-5 Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation ............................... 4-1 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation ............................................................................................... 4-1 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation ....................................... 4-1 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays................................................... 4-2 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation ........................................................................................... 4-2 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation............................................................ 4-3 4.2.1 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation........................................................................... 4-4 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation......................................................................... 4-4 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation .......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer........................................................................................................... 4-5 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio................................................... 4-5 4.2.7 Earphone Jack.................................................................................................................. 4-5 4.2.8 USB Data Cables.............................................................................................................. 4-6 4.2.9 RS232 Cables .................................................................................................................. 4-6 6878215A01 Table of Contents v 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3 Vehicle Interface Port Overview .................................................................................................... 4-6 VIP Output Connections ................................................................................................... 4-7 VIP Input Connections ...................................................................................................... 4-8 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren ..................................................................... 4-9 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) (All Models Except 100W).................................... 4-10 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly............................................................................................ 4-10 4.5.1.1 Disassembly .......................................................................................................... 4-10 4.5.1.2 Assembly ............................................................................................................... 4-11 Adapter Cable................................................................................................................. 4-12 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option ............................................................... 4-12 4.5.2 Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation ............................................ 5-1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description ........................................................................................................ 5-1 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure ...................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit .......................................................................................................... 5-1 5.1.3 Control Head Cable .......................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.4 Microphone ....................................................................................................................... 5-2 Keypad Mic ....................................................................................................................... 5-2 5.1.5 5.1.6 External Speaker .............................................................................................................. 5-2 5.1.7 Headset Capability............................................................................................................ 5-2 Antenna ............................................................................................................................ 5-2 5.1.8 5.1.9 Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire................................................................................................ 5-2 Installation Overview...................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 General ............................................................................................................................. 5-3 Important Installation Hints ............................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.2 5.2.3 Parts Identification ............................................................................................................ 5-5 5.2.4 Order of Installation .......................................................................................................... 5-5 Installing the Universal Mounting Plate.......................................................................................... 5-6 Installing the Speaker and Control Head ....................................................................................... 5-7 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together...................... 5-8 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........ 5-9 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately................. 5-11 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately ... 5-12 Installing the Speaker .................................................................................................................. 5-14 Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip ...................................................................................... 5-14 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting ........................................................................................... 5-14 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting ............................................................... 5-14 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting ........................................................................................ 5-15 Installing Antenna Base and Cables............................................................................................ 5-15 5.7 5.8 Installing the Antenna .................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.9 Cable Routing .............................................................................................................................. 5-18 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure................................................................................. 5-21 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation............................................................................................ 5-22 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure.................................................................................. 5-22 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver................................................................................................ 5-23 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option ...................................................................................... 5-25 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option .................................................................................. 5-25 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory................................................................................................. 5-25 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield.................................................................................... 5-26 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring ....................................................................................................................... 5-28 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring............................................................................................................ 5-28 5.5 5.6 6878215A01 vi Table of Contents Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation.................................................... 6-1 6.1 Cable Connection .......................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 O3 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.3 O5 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1.4 O7 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.1.5 O9 Control Head............................................................................................................... 6-2 6.2 Dust Cover Installation .................................................................................................................. 6-3 6.3 Miscellaneous Information............................................................................................................. 6-4 Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting ............... 7-1 7.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing..................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring .................................. 7-2 7.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines ..................................................... 7-2 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas........................................................................ 7-3 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle .................................................................................................................. 7-3 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker ................................................................................... 7-3 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering..............................................A-1 A.1 Basic Ordering Information............................................................................................................A-1 A.2 Motorola Online .............................................................................................................................A-1 A.3 Mail Orders ....................................................................................................................................A-1 A.5 Fax Orders.....................................................................................................................................A-2 A.6 Parts Identification .........................................................................................................................A-2 A.7 Product Customer Service.............................................................................................................A-2 A.8 Asia Pacific Service Centers .........................................................................................................A-2 Index .....................................................................................................Index-1 Glossary .........................................................................................Glossary-1 Related Publications ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O2 Control Head User Guide..........................................................68012006035 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O3 Control Head User Guide ..........................................................6875946M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O5 Control Head User Guide ..........................................................6875947M01 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O7 Control Head User Guide..........................................................68012006034 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio O9 Control Head User Guide .........................................................68007024014 ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual .....................................................................6875964M01

ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Detailed Service Manual .................................................................6875963M01 6878215A01 List of Figures List of Figures vii Figure 1-1. Front View of APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion ....................... 1-1 Figure 1-2. Side View of APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion......................... 1-1 Figure 1-3. Front View of APX 2500/4500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion .............. 1-1 Figure 1-4. Side View of APX 2500/4500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion................ 1-1 Figure 1-5. Front View of APX 7500 High Power (100W) Transceiver and Trunnion ............................. 1-2 Figure 1-6. Side View of APX 7500 High Power (100W) Transceiver and Trunnion............................... 1-2 Figure 1-7. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount 

Transceiver and Trunnion ..................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-8. Side View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver 

and Trunnion......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-9. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 2500 Mid Power Dash Mount 

Transceiver and Trunnion ..................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-10. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 2500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver 

and Trunnion......................................................................................................................... 1-2 Figure 1-11. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable................................................................ 1-3 Figure 1-12. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable ................................................................. 1-3 Figure 1-13. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-14. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-15. Front View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-3 Figure 1-16. Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion........................................ 1-3 Figure 1-17. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion....................................... 1-4 Figure 1-18. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion........................................ 1-4 Figure 1-19. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion ...................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion........................................................................ 1-4 Figure 1-21. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion

(URC is an orderable accessory.) ......................................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-22. Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion

(URC is an orderable accessory.) ......................................................................................... 1-4 Figure 1-23. Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-24. Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head................................................................... 1-5 Figure 1-25. Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head (Only Applicable for 

ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/APX 6500/APX 7500/APX 6500 Li Mobile) ................... 1-6 Figure 1-26. Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head................................................................... 1-6 Figure 1-27. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, 

CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head......................................................................... 1-7 Figure 1-28. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board 

and O3 Control Head............................................................................................................ 1-7 Figure 1-29. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, 

CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head......................................................................... 1-8 Figure 1-30. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, 

CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head......................................................................... 1-8 Figure 1-31. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board 

and O9 Control Head............................................................................................................ 1-8 Figure 1-32. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and 

O2 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-33. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and 

O3 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-9 Figure 1-34. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and 

O5 Control Head................................................................................................................... 1-9 6878215A01 viii List of Figures Figure 1-35. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and 

O7 Control Head................................................................................................................. 1-10 Figure 1-36. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and 

O9 Control Head................................................................................................................. 1-10 Figure 1-37. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, 

Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional.)...................................1-11 Figure 1-38. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, 

Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional.)...................................1-11 Figure 1-39. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver,

Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional.).................................. 1-12 Figure 1-40. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver,

Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional.).................................. 1-12 Figure 2-1. Dash Mount Radios Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the

Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash (See Figure 2-2 for 100W Radio Install) ............... 2-2 Figure 2-2. Remote Mount Radio Control Heads Can Be Located in the Middle

Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash .................................................... 2-2 Figure 2-3. Remote Mount of the Radio, O9 Control Head

and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional.)................................................................ 2-2 Figure 2-4. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-5. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-3 Figure 2-6. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-7. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Dash Mount).................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-8. Radio Installation (O2 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-5 Figure 2-9. Radio Installation (O3 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-10. Radio Installation (O5 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-6 Figure 2-11. Radio Installation (O7 Mid Power Remote Mount) ............................................................... 2-7 Figure 2-12. Radio Installation (O2 High Power Remote Mount).............................................................. 2-7 Figure 2-13. Radio Installation (O3 High Power Remote Mount).............................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-14. Radio Installation (O5 High Power Remote Mount).............................................................. 2-8 Figure 2-15. Radio Installation (O7 High Power Remote Mount).............................................................. 2-9 Figure 2-16. Radio Installation of O9 Remote Mount with Transceiver (URC is optional.) ....................... 2-9 Figure 2-17. Radio Installation (O9 Remote Mount with Pinouts) ........................................................... 2-10 Figure 2-18. Remote Control Head Pinouts ............................................................................................ 2-10 Figure 2-19. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Dash Mount (Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios) ..........2-11 Figure 2-20. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for Remote Mount .............................................................. 2-12 Figure 2-21. Cabling Interconnect Diagram for 09 Remote Mount (URC is optional.) ............................ 2-13 Figure 2-22. APX 7500/ APX6500/ APX5500/ APX6500Li Mid Power Trunnion Orientation 

(Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios) ................................................................................... 2-19 Figure 2-23. APX 2500/APX4500 Mid Power Trunnion 

Orientation (Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios)................................................................. 2-20 Figure 2-24. Trunnion Orientation for 100W Radios ............................................................................... 2-20 Figure 2-25. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting ............................................................................. 2-22 Figure 2-26. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting.......................................................................................... 2-22 Figure 2-27. 100W Radio Mounting into Quick Release Trunnion.......................................................... 2-24 Figure 2-28. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View 

(Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) ................................................................. 2-25 Figure 2-29. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View...................................................................... 2-26 Figure 2-30. O5 Control Head Rear View (Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads).................... 2-26 Figure 2-31. O9 Control Head Rear View ............................................................................................... 2-27 Figure 2-32. Multiple Control Heads Example Configurations ................................................................ 2-28 Figure 2-33. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View........................................................................... 2-29 Figure 2-34. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID ...................................................................... 2-29 Figure 2-35. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob .................................................... 2-30 Figure 2-36. O3 Control Head................................................................................................................. 2-30 6878215A01 List of Figures ix Figure 2-37. O3 Control Head Rear View ............................................................................................... 2-31 Figure 2-38. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View ........................................................................... 2-31 Figure 2-39. Locking Kit (Optional) (Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios)................................................ 2-32 Figure 2-40. Lock Supplied with 100W Quick Release Trunnion ............................................................ 2-32 Figure 2-41. Bracket Installation.............................................................................................................. 2-33 Figure 2-42. Bracket Installation.............................................................................................................. 2-34 Figure 2-43. Bracket Installation (Assembled State) ............................................................................... 2-34 Figure 2-44. Bracket Uninstallation ......................................................................................................... 2-35 Figure 2-45. Bracket Uninstallation ......................................................................................................... 2-35 Figure 2-46. HKN6188_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector ............................................... 2-36 Figure 2-47. HKN6187_ Power Cable with External Speaker Connector, Record Audio Output Jack 

(2.5 mm) and Earphone Jack (2.5 mm) .............................................................................. 2-36 Figure 2-48. Battery Selector Switch....................................................................................................... 2-37 Figure 2-49. Multiple Antennas Separation............................................................................................. 2-39 Figure 2-50. Mini-UHF Connection (As Shown on Mid Power)............................................................... 2-40 Figure 2-51. Mini-UHF Connection (100W Radios Only) ........................................................................ 2-40 Figure 2-52. Mini-UHF Connector Tool (As Shown on Mid Power)......................................................... 2-41 Figure 2-53. Mini-UHF Connector Tool (100W Radios Only) .................................................................. 2-41 Figure 2-54. GPS Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio.......................................... 2-42 Figure 2-55. GPS Antenna Connector on the Front of the 100W Radio ................................................. 2-42 Figure 2-56. Speaker Mounting............................................................................................................... 2-43 Figure 2-57. Removing the screws on the Control Head ........................................................................ 2-44 Figure 2-58. Removing the Control Head................................................................................................ 2-44 Figure 2-59. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector ............................................................................... 2-45 Figure 2-60. Reattaching the Control Head............................................................................................. 2-45 Figure 2-61. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio.................................................................................... 2-46 Figure 2-62. RFID Location on APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio ................................................. 2-46 Figure 2-63. RFID Location on High Power Radio.................................................................................. 2-47 Figure 2-64. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio........................................................................................ 2-48 Figure 2-65. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio .......................................................................................... 2-48 Figure 2-66. Read Angle for APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio ..................................................... 2-49 Figure 2-67. Tag Angle for APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio........................................................ 2-49 Figure 2-68. Read Angle for High Power Radio...................................................................................... 2-49 Figure 2-69. Tag Angle for High Power Radio......................................................................................... 2-50 Figure 2-70. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation)............................................... 2-50 Figure 2-71. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) ........................................... 2-50 Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation.................................................................................. 3-1 Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View ......................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands......................................................................................... 3-3 Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket...................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-5. Wires Installation................................................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick........................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation .......................................................................................... 3-5 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram ...................................................................................... 4-1 Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram.................................................................................................... 4-2 Figure 4-3. Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount ................................................................... 4-3 Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram ................................................................................. 4-4 Figure 4-5. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections.......................................................................................... 4-5 Figure 4-6. Remote Control Head Pinouts .............................................................................................. 4-6 Figure 4-7. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail.......................................................................................... 4-6 Figure 4-8. Relay Coil.............................................................................................................................. 4-7 Figure 4-9. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory........................................ 4-9 Figure 4-10. Location for Pin 8.................................................................................................................. 4-9 Figure 4-11. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_)........................................ 4-11 6878215A01 x List of Figures Figure 4-12. Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration ................................................................ 4-12 Figure 4-13. Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration.................................................................. 4-12 Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label .......................................................... 5-1 Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) ..................................... 5-6 Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) ................................................................. 5-7 Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together .......................... 5-8 Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together ........... 5-10 Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately ..................... 5-12 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately........ 5-13 Figure 5-8. Location of Band 1 or Band 2 (Depending on the Antenna Port They Align to) ................. 5-15 Figure 5-9. Antenna Band Identification................................................................................................ 5-16 Figure 5-10. APX 2500/APX 4500 Antenna Band Identification ............................................................. 5-16 Figure 5-11. Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS .................................................................................... 5-17 Figure 5-12. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 1 ................................................................................ 5-17 Figure 5-13. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 2 ................................................................................ 5-18 Figure 5-14. Cable Routing..................................................................................................................... 5-19 Figure 5-15. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation........................................................................... 5-21 Figure 5-16. Installing Cables ................................................................................................................. 5-23 Figure 5-17. Installing the Transceiver.................................................................................................... 5-24 Figure 5-18. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework.................................................................................... 5-25 Figure 5-19. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield............................................................................. 5-26 Figure 5-20. Position the Sunshield ........................................................................................................ 5-26 Figure 5-21. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion ................................................................................ 5-27 Figure 5-22. Position Control Head as Desired....................................................................................... 5-27 Figure 5-23. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram................................................................................................ 5-28 Figure 5-24. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram .................................................................................... 5-28 Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations ......................................................................................... 6-3 6878215A01 List of Tables List of Tables xi Table 2-1. Dash O2, O5 or O7 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections. 2-16 Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and 

Ignition Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-16 Table 2-3. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and 

Ignition Connections ...................................................................................................... 2-16 Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS .......................................................................... 2-17 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations........................................................................................... 2-18 Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit.................................................................................................. 2-21 Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables.................................................................................................... 2-28 Table 2-8. Ignition Interface Cables ................................................................................................ 2-29 Table 2-9. Power Cables................................................................................................................. 2-33 Table 2-10. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format.............................................................. 2-51 Table 2-11. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power .................................................................. 2-51 Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections .................................................................................................. 4-7 Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections ..................................................................................................... 4-8 Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List .................................................................................. 5-24 6878215A01 xii List of Tables Notes 6878215A01 Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme xiii Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Typical Model Number:

Position:

M 3 0 U R S 1 6 2 3 4 5 24 = APX 2500 22 = APX 4500 Position 1 - Type of Unit M = Mobile L = Table Top Station Positions 2 & 3 - Model Series 30 = APX 7500 25 = APX 6500 Position 4 - Frequency Band N

=

A P

=

B Q

=

C R

=

D S

=

E T

=

F

=

G

=

H Less than 29.7MHz 29.7 to 35.99MHz 36 to 41MHz 42 to 50MHz 300 to 345MHz 66 to 80MHz 74 to 90MHz Product Specific VHF Range 136 to 162MHz 146 to 178MHz 174 to 210MHz 190 to 235MHz U V W X Y Z

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

=

J K L M

* For APX 7500 "K" in Position 4 represents 136-174MHz.

* For APX 7500 "Q" in Position 4 represents 380-470MHz.

* For APX 7500 "S" in Position 4 represent 470-520MHz.

* For APX 7500 "U" in Position 4 represent 762-870MHz. Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. 330 to 370MHz 366 to 410MHz 403 to 437MHz 438 to 482MHz 470 to 620MHz Product Specific UHF Range 806 to 870MHz*

825 to 870MHz 896 to 941MHz 403-470MHz 1.0 to 1.6GHz 1.5 to 2.0GHz 36 to 60 Watts 61 to 110 Watts Up to 125 Watts 1 to 25 Watts 25 to 40 Watts 25 to 45 Watts 10 to 35 Watts 10 to 50 Watts 25 to 110 Watts 0 to 0.7 Watts 0.7 to 0.9 Watts 1.0 to 3.9 Watts 4.0 to 5.0 Watts 5.1 to 6.0 Watts 6.1 to 10 Watts 10.1 to 15 Watts 16 to 25 Watts 26 to 35 Watts Position 5 - Power Level

=

K

=

A

=

L

=

B

=

M

=

C

=

N

=

D

=

P

=

E

=

Q

=

F

=

R

=

G

=

S

=

H

=

=

T J Note: Values represented are not absolute, and are given to indicate range only. Position 6 - Physical Packages

=

A

=

B

=

C

=

D

=

E

=

F

=

G

=

H

=

J

=

K

=

L

=

M

=

N

=

P

=

Q

=

R

=

S

=

T

=

U

=

V

=

W Position 7 - Channel Spacing 0 =

1 = 5KHz 2 = 6.25KHz 3 = 10KHz 4 = 12.5KHz RF Modem Operation Receiver Only Standard Control; No Display Standard Control; With Display Limited Keypad; No Display Limited Keypad; With Display Full Keypad; No Display Full Keypad; With Display Limited Controls; No Display Limited Controls; Basic Display Limited Controls; Limited Display Rotary Controls; Standard Display Enhanced Controls; Enhanced Display Low Profile; No Display Low Profile; Basic Display Low Profile; Basic Display, Full Keypad Tranceiver with Selectable Control Head 5 = 15KHz 6 = 20/25KHz 7 = 30KHz 8 = 12.5/25KHz 9 = Variable/Programmable VDV Control Head Control Head #2 9 7 P W 1 8 10 9 A 11 N S 12 13 0 P 1 14 15 16 Positions 13 - 16 SP Model Suffix Position 12 -

Unique Model Variations C = Cenelec N = Standard Package Position 11 - Version Version Letter (Alpha) - Major Change Position 10 - Feature Level 1 = Basic 2 = Limited Package 3 = Limited Plus 4 = Intermediate 5 = Standard Package 6 = Standard Plus 7 = Expanded Package 8 = Expanded Plus 9 = Full Feature/

Programmable A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 2 Position 9 - Primary System Type

=

Conventional

=

Privacy Plus

=

Clear SMARTNET

=

Advanced Conventional Stat-Alert

=

Enhanced Privacy Plus

=

Nauganet 888 Series

=

Japan Specialized Mobile Radio (JSMR)

=

Multi-Channel Access (MCA)

=

CoveragePLUS

=

MPT1327* - Public

=

MPT1327* - Private

=

Radiocom

=

Tone Signalling

=

Binary Signalling

=

Phonenet

=

IDEN Basic

=

IDEN Advanced Feature

=

JSMR Digital

=

LTR Protocol

=

Single Sideband

=

Programmable

=

Secure Conventional

=

Secure SMARTNET

=

TETRA

=

SmartZone

* MPT = Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications A B C D E F G H J K L M N P Q R S T Position 8 - Primary Operation

=

Conventional/Simplex

=

Conventional/Duplex

=

Trunked Twin Type

=

Dual Mode Trunked

=

Dual Mode Trunked/Duplex

=

Trunked Type I

=

Trunked Type II

=

FDMA* Digital Dual Mode

=

TDMA** Digital Dual Mode

=

Single Sideband

=

Global Positioning Satellite Capable

=

Amplitude Companded Sideband (ACSB)

=

Digital Dispatch

=

Programmable

=

Digital Interconnect

=

Digital Multi-Service

=

9600 Capable

=

TDMA

* FDMA = Frequency Division Multiple Access

** TDMA = Time Division Multiple Access MAEPF-27634-B 6878215A01 xiv Mobile Radio Model Numbering Scheme Notes 6878215A01 Commercial Warranty Commercial Warranty xv Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS I. What This Warranty Covers And For How Long MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC. (MOTOROLA) warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:

ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Product Accessories One (1) Year One (1) Year Motorola, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty. II. General Provisions This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA'S responsibilities regarding the Product. Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLA's option, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. 6878215A01 xvi III. State Law Rights Commercial Warranty SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY. This warranty gives specific legal rights, and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state. IV. How To Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product, it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. You can also call Motorola at 1-888-567-7347 US/Canada. V. What This Warranty Does Not Cover A. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. B. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. C. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. D. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. E. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs

(including, without limitation, the addition to the Product of non-Motorola supplied equipment) which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola's normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim. F. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. G. Rechargeable batteries if:

- any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering.

- the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. H. Freight costs to the repair depot. I. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAs published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. J. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product. K. Normal and customary wear and tear. 6878215A01 Commercial Warranty VI. Patent And Software Provisions xvii MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent, and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:

A. B. that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;

that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise; and C. should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLA's opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product. The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. VII. Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois, USA. 6878215A01 xviii Commercial Warranty Notes 6878215A01 Chapter 1 Introduction This manual covers the installation procedures for ASTRO APX mobile and motorcycle radios with O2, O3, O5, O7 and O9 control heads, and accessories required to complete the radio system. The radio system consists of a control head, radio, antenna, microphone, speaker, cabling, Universal Relay Controller (URC), and accessories. 1.1 Mobile Radio Description 1.1.1 Dimensions Figure 1-1, Figure 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4 show the basic dimensions of the dash mount transceiver trunnion APX mobile radio. The transceiver portion of a remote mount APX mobile is sized similarly. When installing the radio, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the rear of the radio for cabling and accessory connections; in the front of the radio for access, controls, and cabling (if remote mount); and to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws/wing screws. NOTE: The measurement unit used in Figure 1-1 to Figure 1-22 is millimeter. 206 180 256 244 51 83 Figure 1-1. Front View of APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-2. Side View of APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion NOTE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in to the overall length. The remote mount length

is 244 mm. 224 206 222 209 69 89 Figure 1-3. Front View of APX 2500/4500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-4. Side View of APX 2500/4500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 1-2 Introduction Mobile Radio Description NOTE: The rear accessory connector adds 0.75 in to the overall length. The remote mount length

is 194mm. 223 293 Figure 1-5. Front View of APX 7500 High Power (100W) Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-6. Side View of APX 7500 High Power (100W) Transceiver and Trunnion 74 90 206 278 269 69 92 Figure 1-7. Front View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX 7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion Figure 1-8. Side View of O2 Control Head Attached to APX7500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 224 178 51 207 194 Figure 1-9. Front View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 2500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 51 80 Figure 1-10. Side View of O7 Control Head Attached to APX 2500 Mid Power Dash Mount Transceiver and Trunnion 6878215A01 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 1-3 61 38 153 Figure 1-11. Front View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable Figure 1-12. Side View of O3 Control Head with Coiled Cable 209 123 97 99 Figure 1-13. Front View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-14. Side View of O2 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 180 75 51 Figure 1-15. Front View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-16. Side View of O5 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 6878215A01 1-4 Introduction Mobile Radio Description 209 178 108 82 91 Figure 1-17. Front View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion Figure 1-18. Side View of O7 Control Head with Remote Mount and Trunnion 190 83 178 Figure 1-19. Front View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion Figure 1-20. Side View of O9 Control Head with Trunnion 185 210 61.5 Figure 1-21. Top View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion

(URC is an orderable accessory.) Figure 1-22. Side View of O9 Universal Relay Controller with Trunnion

(URC is an orderable accessory.) 6878215A01 Introduction Standard Configurations Standard Configurations 1.2 1.2.1 Dash Mount Configuration 1-5 NOTE: The dash mount configuration is not applicable for 100W radios and O9 control heads. There are two versions of the APX mobile dash mount. The first are the O2, O5 and O7 control heads which are mounted on the front of the transceiver housing. The second is the O3 control head which is connected to the transceiver via a coiled cable, which is plugged into the CAN connector on the transceiver. Electrical connection between the two takes place within the radio via a flexible circuit board between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the control head for O2, O5 and O7 and between the connectors on the front of the transceiver and at the back of the TIB for the O3. ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500/APX 4500 Figure 1-23. Dash Mount Configuration for O2 Control Head ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500 Figure 1-24. Dash Mount Configuration for O3 Control Head 6878215A01 1-6 Introduction Standard Configurations ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile Figure 1-25. Dash Mount Configuration for O5 Control Head (Only Applicable for ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/APX 6500/APX 7500/APX 6500 Li Mobile) ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500 Figure 1-26. Dash Mount Configuration for O7 Control Head For details on this configuration, see Section 2.2.1 on page 2-21. 6878215A01 Introduction Standard Configurations 1.2.2 Remote Mount Configuration 1-7 In the remote control version, the transceiver and the control head are mounted separately in the vehicle. The O2, O5 and O7 control heads are mounted in remote trunnions near the operator.The O3 and O9 control heads are also mounted near the operator using extension cables. The transceiver and control head are mounted using a trunnion or other mounting hardware. If the transceiver is located in a car trunk, ensure that it is mounted securely and that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover the transceiver with baggage, blankets, etc. NOTE: The keypad mic should only be plugged into the Modified Modular Plug (MMP) connector located on the control head, in either dash mount or remote mount configuration. ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500/APX 4500 MMP MMP MMP MMP Figure 1-27. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O2 Control Head ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable Figure 1-28. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O3 Control Head 6878215A01 1-8 Introduction Standard Configurations ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile MMP MMP Figure 1-29. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O5 Control Head ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500 ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 5500/

APX 6500/APX 7500/

APX 6500 Li Mobile MMP MMP Figure 1-30. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board, CHIB Rear Assembly and O7 Control Head ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 7500 17 ft Extension Cable Figure 1-31. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Transceiver, Transceiver Interface Board and O9 Control Head 6878215A01 Introduction Standard Configurations 1-9 Figure 1-32. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and O2 Control Head 5 m (17 ft) Extension Cable Figure 1-33. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and O3 Control Head Figure 1-34. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and O5 Control Head 6878215A01 1-10 Introduction Standard Configurations Figure 1-35. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and O7 Control Head Figure 1-36. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver and O9 Control Head 6878215A01 Introduction Standard Configurations 1-11 17 ft Extension Cable O7 to URC Cable Figure 1-37. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional.) 17 ft Extension Cable O9 to URC Cable Figure 1-38. Remote Mount Configuration with Mid Power Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional.) 6878215A01 1-12 Introduction Standard Configurations O7 to URC Cable 17 ft Extension Cable Figure 1-39. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O7 Control Head (URC is optional.) O9 to URC Cable 17 ft Extension Cable Figure 1-40. Remote Mount Configuration with High Power (100W) Radio Transceiver, Universal Relay Controller and O9 Control Head (URC is optional.) For details on these configurations, see Section 2.2.2 on page 2-23. 6878215A01 Introduction Standard Configurations 1.2.3 Multi Control Head 1-13 The multi control head option allows separate, remotely operated control heads to operate and control the radio. For example, a fire truck could have a control head located in the cab and on the rear of the truck so that the radio could be operated from outside the vehicle. NOTE: The dual control head can be used together in the future. 6878215A01 1-14 Introduction Motorcycle Configurations 1.3 Motorcycle Configurations 1.4 NOTE: The motorcycle configurations are not applicable for 100W radios and O9 control heads. The ASTRO APX mobile motorcycle radio models provide most of the equipment needed for installing a standard ASTRO APX mobile radio on a motorcycle. Most of this radio system is standard equipment. See Chapter 5: Motorcycle Radio Installation for further information. Base/Control Stations NOTE: The base/control station option is not applicable for 100W radios and O9 control heads. If mobile radio equipment is installed at a fixed location and operated as a control station or as a fixed unit, the antenna installation must comply with the following requirements in order to ensure optimal performance and compliance with the RF energy exposure limits in the standards and guidelines listed in the 6881095C99 manual:

The antenna should be mounted outside the building on the roof or a tower if at all possible. As with all fixed site antenna installations, it is the responsibility of the licensee to manage the site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements and may require additional compliance actions such as site survey measurements, signage, and site access restrictions in order to ensure that exposure limits are not exceeded. 1.5 Tools Required for APX Mobile Installations Tool Part Number 10 mm wrench 5 mm Allen wrench Rubber-coated pliers Regular slot screwdriver of Phillips #2 Pin removal tool RF antenna tool Wing screw torque tool 6680163F01 HLN6695_ HLN6970_ 6878215A01 Chapter 2 Standard Configurations 2.1 Planning the Installation The APX mobile radio operates only in negative ground electrical systems with a valid operating range of 10.8VDC to 16.3VDC. Before starting the radio installation, make sure that the ground polarity of the vehicle is correct. Accidentally reversing the polarity will not damage the radio, but will cause the cable fuses to blow. Planning is the key to fast, easy radio installation. Before starting the installation, inspect the vehicle and determine how and where you intend to mount the antenna, radio, and accessories. Plan wire and cable runs to provide maximum protection from inching, crushing, and overheating.

!

C a u t i o n Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual for warnings or recommendations. The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Failure to properly install the device may result in damage to the device, or improper operation. 2-2 2.1.1 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Installation Examples The mobile two-way radio offers various methods of installation, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. The radio can be a dash or remote mount except for the 100W radio or with 09 control head, which can only be mounted remotely. The O9 control head with the radio and the URC can only be mounted remotely (see Figure 2-3). Speaker Radio Antenna

1/4-Wavelength 911 Battery Radio Figure 2-1. Dash Mount Radios Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash (See Figure 2-2 for 100W Radio Install) Speaker Control

Head Antenna

1/4-Wavelength 911 Radio Battery Control

Head Figure 2-2. Remote Mount Radio Control Heads Can Be Located in the Middle Console, on the Transmission Hump, or Under the Dash Control Head Speaker Antenna

1/4-Wavelength Siren Speaker Radio Siren Box 911 Battery Universal Relay Controller Box Figure 2-3. Remote Mount of the Radio, O9 Control Head and Universal Relay Controller (URC is optional.) NOTE: 100W radio install is typically at the rear vehicle compartment. 6878215A01 2-14 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2.1.3 Radio Operation Wiring for Dash and Remote Configurations Determine from Table 2-1, Table 2-2, or Table 2-3 the radio functionality you wish to achieve, which is controlled by the vehicles ignition switch state, the physical wiring of the radios ignition sense (ACC) wire, and by the programmed CPS setting. For additional radio functionality as determined by the programming of the ignition switch in CPS, refer to the HELP menu in your CPS (i.e. Ignition as:

Required, Blank, Soft Power Off, TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit, Ignition Only Power Up). Choose a clean ignition point which is not shared in the immediate vicinity by other high current accessories/devices. This will help to reduce the transients on the ignition line. Examples of 

high-current accessories/devices are: Air Horn, relays, lightbars and etc. It is recommended to wire to the vehicles ACC line, not the START or the solenoid side of the ignition circuit. Refer to chapter 6 for best installation practices. The Ignition sense (ACC) cable uses either a 3-amp fuse

(6580283E01) or 4-amp fuse (6580283E02). 2.1.3.1 Dash Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The standard dash mount rear ignition sense cable HLN6863 contains a thin red ignition wire, a jumper wire that shorts emergency to ground, and two gray wires attached to an external speaker plug. The thin RED wire is the ignition sensed wire. Refer to Table 2-1, Table 2-2, or Table 2-3 for its correct wiring configurations. NOTE: This cable MUST be attached in order for the radio to operate in Dash mount, regardless of how emergency is programmed in CPS or wired inside the vehicle. Either the emergency jumper wire or an emergency accessory (footswitch or button) must be wired to the rear of the transceiver in Dash mount. Otherwise, upon attachment of the radios power cable to the vehicle battery, the radio will incorrectly determine that emergency operation has been activated, such as when an emergency footswitch is de-pressed and the emergency pin is ungrounded. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-15 2.1.3.2 Remote Mount: Power, Ignition, and Emergency Cable Installation The single control head O2, O5, O7 or O9 remote mount configurations receive power from the J200 connectors red and black wires. The yellow wire at J200 is one ignition sense wire. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high power radios, the J200 yellow wire or the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. If the HLN6863 is attached at J100 of the O2, O5, O7 or O9 control head, the thin red wire will NOT function as an ignition sense wire, since the J100 connector has no ignition sense electrical connection. NOTE: It is incorrect for installation to attach ignition sense at more than one wire or connector. 

Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2 for its correct wiring configurations. The O3 control head receives its power down the CAN cable, and detects the ignition state by the ignition sense pin at either J2 or J600. On mid power radios, the J2 and J600 connectors can also be used for ignition sense. On high power radios, only the J600 connector can be used for ignition sense. In Multi-Control Head installations, the yellow ignition wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. See Section 2.2.2.5 Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 2-29 for further information. In remote mount O2, O3, O5, O7 or O9, an Emergency jumper to ground is placed by default on the TIB (JU344) so that there is no need to attach a cable with an emergency accessory at either J2 or at J600. This jumper must be removed if an emergency accessory (footswitch or button to Ground) is installed at either J2 or J600 (or J626 on the accessory cable) locations. If the jumper JU344 is removed but no emergency accessory is installed, the radio will power-up incorrectly into emergency mode all the time. Refer to Figure 4-3 for details. The design of the control head is different compared to the transceiver, therefore it is also NOT necessary to attach HLN6863 at J100 to prevent accidental emergency operation. The control head uses an edge-detect, not a state-detect like on the transceiver, so mounting of HLN6863 is not mandatory. 6878215A01 2-16 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation Table 2-1. Dash O2, O5 or O7 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Dash Mount Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire X X X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. Table 2-2. Remote O2, O5, O7, or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Remote Mount Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yellow Wire Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yellow Wire Control Head Red Wire Control Head Yellow Wire Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls X X X X X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. Table 2-3. Remote O2, O5, O7 or O9 Radio Operations Dependent Upon A+ and Ignition Connections Mid Power Dash/Remote High Power Dash/Remote Connected to battery Connected to ignition switch Ignition switch controls

!

C a u t i o n Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 Transceiver Red Power Wire HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J2 HLN6863 Thin Red Wire at J626 X X X No ignition switch control. Enables ignition switch functionality as programmed in the codeplug. Illegal wiring configuration. See CAUTION note. X X X DO NOT connect any wires to the battery terminals until you have finished the entire radio installation (Dash or Remote Mount) configuration to avoid potential equipment damage. Incorrect wiring of the radio may result in incorrect ignition sense detection, incorrect power-on state, or incorrect power-off state of the radio system. The Control Head Power cable wire (RED) and Transceiver Power cable wire (RED) are always attached to the battery terminal and NOT to the ignition switch. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2-17 2.1.4 Ignition Sense Switch (Radio Wide Advance) CPS selectable settings to control the radios functionality based on the state of the vehicles Ignition status. Feature Blank TX Inhibit PTT TX Inhibit Required Table 2-4. Ignition Sense Switch Settings in CPS Description Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed or with the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed. Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed or with the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed. If IGNITION is not present all transmissions are inhibited. The radio will not affiliate with trunking systems and therefore CANNOT receive any trunking dispatch communications. Emergency Alarm transmissions are NOT possible with the use of the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed or with the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed. If IGNITION is not present all transmissions are inhibited. The radio is able to affiliate with trunking systems. The radio can ONLY receive trunking dispatch communications. Emergency Alarm transmissions are possible with the use of the emergency power up feature. Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed and Ignition is present. Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is cycled and radio was previously ON. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Soft Power Off Radio POWERS ON when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is detected. Radio POWERS OFF when the Power Button is pressed, or when Ignition is lost. Ignition Only Power Up Radio POWERS ON when Ignition is present. Radio POWERS OFF when Ignition is lost. Control head power button is ignored. NOTE: When either TX Inhibit, PTT TX Inhibit or Required are selected, the Emergency Power Up feature will not be available to the radio-user.



When any other Ignition Switch setting is made, Emergency Power Up is available to the radio-user, regardless of current ignition state.



Any optional inactivity time-out timer setting in CPS may delay the power off of the radio once Ignition sense is removed. 6878215A01 2-18 Standard Configurations Planning the Installation 2.1.5 Siren/PA Configuration/Programming The Siren/PA is shipped pre-wired for 100W operation. It can be rewired for 65W, 75W, or 130W power levels. To change to another power level, perform the following:

1. Open the Siren/PA connector cover to gain access to the two-connector speaker leads. Do not change the speaker common lead (pin 20). The other lead is connected to pin 35 (for 100W operation). 2. Using an appropriate pin removal tool, extract pin 35 and move it to one of the following pin locations:

- pin location 36 for 75W operation

- pin location 28 for 65W or 130W operation 3. For 65W or 75W operation, no further changes are required. Reassemble the connector. 4. For 130W operation, you must parallel two 11 speakers, each rated at 65W minimum. Proper phasing of the two speakers is important--when connecting two speakers in parallel, wire similar speaker terminals together to ensure maximum loudness and prevent

"deadspots." For example, if the terminals are marked "1" and "2", connect the terminals marked "1" together and connect those wires to one speaker lead. Connect the terminals marked "2" together and connect those wires to the other speaker lead.

!

C a u t i o n Before continuing, remember that under a high-line supply condition

(16.6V), up to 30% more power will go to the speaker(s) after reconfiguring for 130W operation. Do this only when your PA speakers are capable of handling the extra power. 5. When the Siren/PA is configured for dual speaker, 130W operation, it is necessary to remove a resistor and move two jumpers to set the correct power level. Remove the Siren/PA cover, and locate resistor R219 (0 ohm). This resistor should be removed for 130W operation. Locate jumpers JU100 and JU101. These jumpers should be installed for 130W operation. 6. Close and reconnect the Siren/PA connector cover. NOTE:Jumpers JU100 and JU101 do not affect the Siren output level. JU100 and JU101 compensate for the lower speaker load and the two speakers in parallel, by decreasing the gain U102-1. JU100 affects the radio PA level and JU101 affects the PA audio level. Pin locations of various power level configurations are listed in Table 2-5 Table 2-5. Power Level Configurations Pin location of speaker leads 65W 75W 100W 130W 20,28 20,36 20,35 20,28 R219 IN IN IN OUT JU100/JU101 Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins A and B Across pins B and C 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2 Radio Mounting 2-19

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT mount the radio on a plastic mounting surface without first reinforcing the mounting surface; the weight of the radio may crack or break the mounting surface. DO NOT mount the radio on a flat or concave surface where the radio could be partially submersed in water. This is especially important if the cab area of the vehicle is cleaned by spraying with water. If the radio sits in water for a length of time, moisture may seep inside the radio and damage the electronic components. DO NOT allow water to stand in recessed areas of vertically mounted radios. Remove any moisture immediately to prevent it from seeping down into the radio. Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that will permit routing the RF antenna cable as directly as possible. NOTE: For optimum radio performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 2-22 or Figure 2-23 for mid power and Figure 2-24 for high power. For new or existing installations of all but 100W radios, use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit number HLN7002_except for APX 2500 and APX 4500 which shall use the trunnion with kit number HLN6861_. For new or existing installations of 100W radios, use only the APX mobile trunnion, kit numbers HLN7003_. RADIO FRONT APPLIES TO RADIOS IN DASH AND REMOTE INSTALLATIONS Figure 2-22. APX 7500/ APX6500/ APX5500/ APX6500Li Mid Power Trunnion Orientation

(Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios) 6878215A01 2-20 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting RADIO FRONT Figure 2-23. APX 2500/APX4500 Mid Power Trunnion Orientation (Cannot Be Used for 100W Radios) Figure 2-24. Trunnion Orientation for 100W Radios 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.1 Dash Mount with Trunnion 2-21 NOTE: This configuration is not applicable for 100W radios. 1. Referring to Figure 2-6, select the suitable trunnion kit per the type of mid power transceiver. 2. Select the location to mount your radio on the transmission hump (see Figure 2-25) or under the dash (see Figure 2-26). NOTE: When mounting the trunnion on the transmission hump take care the transmission housing is not affected. Plan your installation ensuring enough room for the Accessory connector and cable in the back of the radio. 3. Using the trunnion mounting bracket as a template, mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. Use the innermost four holes for a curved mounting surface such as the transmission hump, and the four outmost holes for a flat surface such as under the dash. 4. Center punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 5. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided 

(see Figure 2-25 and Figure 2-26). 6. Ensure that the plastic guides are aligned (horizontal) to the grooves of the trunnion. Slide the radio into the grooves until it snaps into place (see Figure 2-26). Table 2-6. Mid Power Trunnion Kit Item Part Number Description Mid Power Transceiver 1 2 3 0371859H01 Trunnion Mounting Screw APX 5500/APX 6500/APX 6500 Li/APX 7500 0305760W02 Trunnion Mounting Wing Screw APX 2500/APX 4500 0312002B14 Self-Drilling Tapping Screw APX 5500/APX 6500/APX 6500 Li/APX 7500 APX 2500/APX 4500 HLN7002_ Mackinaw Trunnion Hardware Kit APX 5500/APX 6500/APX 6500 Li/APX 7500 HLN6861_ Millenium Trunnion Hardware Kit APX 2500/APX 4500 6878215A01 2-22 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 3 1 1 Figure 2-25. Transmission Hump Trunnion Mounting 1 3 2 Tabs Plastic Guides 1 Groove Threaded Hole for Screw Figure 2-26. Below Dash Trunnion Mounting 7. Secure the radio with two screws provided (Item 1 in Table 2-6). The torque down force for 0371859H01 should be between 50in-lbf to 52in-lbf. 8. For screw 0305760W02, the wing screw torque tool (HLN6970_) is designed to securely tighten the trunnion wing screws while installing the radio. The tool can also be used to loosen the wing screws. Detailed instructions are included in the tool packaging. NOTE: This configuration shows the O5 control head. The TIB is used for O3 control head for the same configuration. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2.2.2 Remote Mount with Trunnion 2-23 Before installing any electrical equipment, check the vehicle manufacturers user manual.

!

C a u t i o n The installation of this device should be completed by an authorized servicer or installer. Before making any holes in the trunk for radio mounting, check the vehicle manufacturer's user manual for restrictions (e.g. due to the gas tank location). For a remote mount installation, the transceiver may be mounted anywhere in the vehicle, provided that the installation location is safe, follows the cautions mentioned at the beginning of this section, and is accessible for servicing/maintenance as well as cabling. A typical mounting location recommended by Motorola is in the vehicles trunk. The trunnion provided may still be used to mount the transceiver, and the mounting process is the same as for the dash mount installation 

(Section 2.2.1 on page 2-21). However, for 100W radios you must follow the procedure detailed below in Section 2.2.2.1. See Figure 2-10, Figure 2-11, Figure 2-13, or Figure 2-14 for a remote installation. 6878215A01 2-24 2.2.2.1 100W Radios Only Standard Configurations Radio Mounting NOTE: Cabling to the front of the radio (TIB) should not be completed with the handle opened as it is needed to be removed to close the handle. It is suggested that the cabling is to be attached to the front of the radio after the radio is assembled into the trunnion. 1. After selecting the mounting location, use the trunnion mounting bracket as a template and mark the positions of the holes on the mounting surface. 2. Center-punch the spots you have marked and realign the trunnion in position. 3. Secure the trunnion mounting bracket with the four self-drilling screws provided 

(see Figure 2-27). 4. After the trunnion has been mounted in the vehicle using the screws provided, install the radio. Place the radio with the lock handle fully opened on the trunnion, oriented at least

10 mm in front of the rear catches. Push the radio towards the rear catches. The radio is lifted up slightly and then drops back down, flushed with the trunnion, and stops against the rear catches. Once this occurs, close the lock handle. Rotate the handle towards the top of the radio until it is locked in place. The key is not needed in the lock to close the handle, but is needed to reopen. The keys can only be removed from the lock when it is in the locked position. Figure 2-27. 100W Radio Mounting into Quick Release Trunnion 2.2.2.2 Remote Mount Control Head Installation Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The recommended mounting surfaces for the control unit are under the mounting surface, on the transmission hump, or on the center console. Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-29 shows how the trunnion, control head, and cables should be installed for the O2, O5, O7 or O9 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers (i.e. Dust Covers) HLN6980_ are provided with the radio.

They should be installed on exposed connectors for added environmental robustness. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-25 An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the control unit. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb passenger seating or leg room. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. If the trunnion is mounted on a plastic mounting surface, all four mounting screws should penetrate the mounting surfaces supporting metal frame. If that is not possible, use a metal backing plate (not supplied) to strengthen the installation. Install the control follows:

1. Use the control unit trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes; drill 5/32" holes. 

If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10-16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the control head (adjusting for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to be sure the control head feels securely locked in place while you are pressing its buttons. 4. Finish installation by fully tightening screws. Metal Backing Plate

(Not Supplied) Figure 2-28. O5 Control Head Installation Exploded View

(Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) 6878215A01 2-26 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting ADJUST THE CONTROL HEAD TO DESIRED ANGLE AND SECURE WITH WING SCREWS MOUNTING SURFACE IMPORTANT USE A METAL BACKING PLATE

(NOT SUPPLIED) IF MOUNTING TRUNNION ON PLASTIC OR UNSTABLE SURFACE USE FOUR MOUNTING SCREWS ON ALL INSTALLATIONS TRUNNION DRILL FOUR 5/32'' HOLES IN MOUNTING SURFACE Figure 2-29. O9 Control Head Installation Exploded View Figure 2-30. O5 Control Head Rear View

(Also applicable for O2 and O7 Control Heads) 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-27 2.2.2.3 Multiple Control Head Installation Figure 2-31. O9 Control Head Rear View Control heads in a multiple control head configuration should be installed per the steps detailed in Section 2.2.2.2: Remote Mount Control Head Installation on page 2-24. Two heads can be connected to each of the two CAN connectors on the transceiver, with the remaining heads connected to one or both of the first two. Control heads can also be connected a daisy chain configuration from a single transceiver CAN connector. See Figure 2-32 for examples. NOTE: The transceiver must be configured for Multiple Control Head via CPS programming. Navigate to the Control Head tab in the Radio Wide section of CPS, and select Help for further information and tutorials. FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 3 FUSE Control Head 4 J300R J300L J200 J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 1 Control Head 2 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY 6878215A01 2-28 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting FUSE J300R J300L J200 J300R J300L J200 FUSE Control Head 1 Control Head 2 RED LEAD

(+)

(-) BATTERY J300R J300L J200 FUSE J300R FUSE J200 Control Head 3 Control Head 4 Figure 2-32. Multiple Control Heads Example Configurations NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. See Section 2.2.2.5 Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 2-29 for further information. Use the most convenient configuration for your installation, ensuring that the combined cable lengths do not exceed 131 feet (40 meters). See Table 2-7 for a list of available CAN cable lengths. Control head ground, power and ignition sense wires (black, red, and yellow respectively) may need additional length (not supplied) in installations that locate the head more than 10 feet from a power source. Table 2-7. Available CAN Cables Part Number Description HKN6164_ Cable, Remote Mount, 40m (131ft) HKN6165_ Cable, Remote Mount, 35m (115ft) HKN6166_ Cable, Remote Mount, 23m (75ft) HKN6167_ Cable, Remote Mount, 15m (50ft) HKN6168_ Cable, Remote Mount, 9m (30ft) HKN6169_ Cable, Remote Mount, 5m (17ft) HKN6170_ Cable, Remote Mount, 3m (10ft) PMLN4958_ Cable, O3 Extension, 5m (17ft) 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-29 Table 2-8. Ignition Interface Cables Part Number Description HLN6863_ Cable, M.A.P. 26pin with Only Ignition and SPK PMLN4959_ Cable, Y-Splitter with DB-25 and M.A.P. Interface 2.2.2.4 Cable Installation Route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges or crushing. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Figure 2-19 shows how the cables and components are connected. It is not recommended to route cabling or wiring inside the wheel wells of a vehicle. 2.2.2.5 Setting the Initial Control Head ID The Front Panel Programming (FPP) mode allows you to define which control head in a Multi Control Head system becomes control head number 1-4. Set the control head ID number for each attached head the first time Multi Control Head is used. 1. Press the power button to power off the radio. 2. Press and hold left-most menu and the orange button on the control head simultaneously. O5 Emergency Button Power Button Left-most Menu Button Figure 2-33. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View 3. Press the power button to power on the control head. The head will power on into FPP mode and display the current control head ID number:

CH ID#

1 Figure 2-34. Radio Display with Current Control Head ID 4. Turn the Mode knob to change the control heads ID number. 6878215A01 2-30 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting O5 Mode Knob Figure 2-35. APX Mobile O5 Control Head Front View Mode Knob 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 above to set the ID of the remaining control heads. NOTE: In Multiple Control Head (MCH) installations, the yellow ignition sense wire must be connected to the head assigned ID # 1. 2.2.2.6 O3 Control Head and Remote Mount Cabling Choose a mounting location for the radio, considering accessibility, and control and antenna cable lengths. The control head extension cable and the accessories cable should be installed and routed properly to avoid complications. Route the cables in the vehicles wiring troughs (where available) or route the cables where they are protected from pinching, sharp edges, or crushing. One suggested route is along one side of the driveshaft hump under the carpet. Use grommets in any holes where the cable passes through metal panels. Top Left Front Right Back Figure 2-36. O3 Control Head The recommended mounting surface for the control unit is on the center console. Figure 2-38 shows how the hang-up clip control head, and cables should be installed for the O3 control head. NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Radio Mounting 2-31 A mounting clip, which allows the control head to be mounted, is supplied together with the control head. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories, nor disturb the passenger seating. The control head must be within convenient reach and viewing of the user. Install the mounting clip as follows:

1. Use the provided mounting clip to determine the location of the two screw holes. 2. Drill 7/16 deep holes for upper and lower screws. 3. Use the tapping screw provided to install the mounting clip.

!

C a u t i o n Care must be taken to shield the control head (front and back) from direct exposure to pressurized water. The pressurized water from a hose, in most cases, is more severe than the stated test and conditions in typical environments. Vehicle Mounting Surface VEHICLE DASHBOARD 1 1 2 2 2 2 Item No. 1 2 Part Number Description 01-80743T91 03-07644M19 Mic Hang-Up Clip Assembly Screw, Machine,

8-32 x 7/16 Figure 2-38. Hang-Up Clip Installation Exploded View Figure 2-37. O3 Control Head Rear View 6878215A01 2-38 2.4 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation Antenna Installation IMPORTANT:

To assure optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, these antenna installation guidelines and instructions are limited to metal-body vehicles with appropriate ground planes and take into account the potential exposure of back seat passengers and bystanders outside the vehicle. NOTE: For mobile radios with rated power of 7 watts or less, the only installation restrictions are to use only Motorola approved antennas and install the antenna externally on metal body vehicles. For mobile radios with tuned power greater than 7 watts, always adhere to all the guidelines and restrictions in Section 2.4.1 below. 2.4.1 Selecting an Antenna Site/Location on a Metal Body Vehicle 1. External installation Check the requirements of the antenna supplier and install the vehicle antenna external to a metal body vehicle in accordance with those requirements. 2. Roof top For optimum performance and compliance with RF Energy Safety standards, mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. 3. Trunk lid On some vehicles with clearly defined, flat trunk lids, the antennas of some radio models (see restrictions below) can also be mounted on the center area of the trunk lid. For vehicles without clearly defined, flat trunk lids (such as hatchback autos, sports utility vehicles, and pick-up trucks), mount the antenna in the center area of the roof. Before installing an antenna on the trunk lid,

- Be sure that the distance from the antenna location on the trunk lid will be at least 85 cm

(33 inches) from the front surface of the rear seat-back to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards.

- Ensure that the trunk lid is grounded by connecting grounding straps between the trunk lid and the vehicle chassis.

!

C a u t i o n If these conditions cannot be satisfied, then mount the antenna on the roof top. 4. Mounting restrictions for certain radio models. For all VHF and UHF models, the 1/4 wave antenna should be mounted only in the center area of the roof, not on the trunk lid, to assure compliance with RF Energy Safety standards. 5. Ensure that the antenna cable can be easily routed to the radio. Route the antenna cable as far away as possible from any vehicle electronic control units and associated wiring. 6. Check the antenna location for any electrical interference. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-39 7. Ensure that any transmitting radio antennas on this vehicle are separated from each other by at least 3 feet (0.9 meter). See Figure 2-49. 8. The minimum distance between the antenna and the radio/accessories should be at least 

3 feet (91.44 cm). NOTE: Any two metal pieces rubbing against each other (such as seat springs, shift levers, trunk and hood lids, exhaust pipes, etc.) in close proximity to the antenna can cause severe receiver interference. 3 ft 3 ft3 ft 911 Figure 2-49. Multiple Antennas Separation 6878215A01 2-40 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2.4.2 Mini-UHF Connection To help aid in the installation of the radio antenna(s), there are labels indicating the frequency. The first is on the FCC label at the top of the radio which calls out the frequency and by using arrow points, which side the RF connector of the frequency is located at the back of the radio. The second is located at the back of the radio, next to the RF connector(s) (see Figure 2-50). To ensure a secure connection of an antenna cable's mini-UHF plug to a radio's mini-UHF jack, their interlocking features must be properly engaged. If they are not properly engaged, the system will loosen. Using a tool (pliers or wrench) will not overcome a poor engagement, and is not recommended. NOTE: Applying excessive force with a tool can cause damage to the antenna or the connector 

(e.g., stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break). The mini-UHF connector tool (Motorola part number HLN6695_) is designed to securely tighten the antenna plugradio jack connection without damaging either the plug or the jack. Motorola recommends the following sequence to ensure proper attachment of the system 

(see Figure 2-50 and Figure 2-51):

Coax Conductor Plug (Pin) Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Cable Mini UHF Jack RF Antenna Connector Label Figure 2-50. Mini-UHF Connection (As Shown on Mid Power) Coax Conductor Plug (Pin) Collar Pulled Back to Flange Flange Mini UHF Jack Cable Figure 2-51. Mini-UHF Connection (100W Radios Only) 1. Make sure that there is sufficient slack in the antenna cable. 2. Make sure that the collar of the antenna cable plug is loose and does not bind. 3. Make sure that the mini-UHF jack is tight in the radio housing. 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2-41 4. Slide the collar back against the flange. Insert the antenna cable plugs pin fully into the radio jack, but do not engage the threads. 5. Ensure that the plugs and jacks interlocking features are fully seated. Check this by grasping the crimp on the cable jack, rotating the cable, and noting any movement. If the features are seated correctly, there should be NO movement. 6. Finger-tighten the antenna cable plugs collar onto the radios jack. 7. Give a final tug, by hand, to the collar, and retighten by hand as firmly as possible. 8. Slip the mini-UHF connector tool over the coaxial cable, using the gap between the tools legs

(see Figure 2-52). Then, slide the tool up onto the plugs knurled collar. Squeeze the two straight legs of the tool firmly together between your thumb and index finger and turn clockwise (as shown) to tighten the collar. It should take 1/4 turn or less. When you feel the tool slipping on the collar, the connection has been properly tightened. The tool can also be used to loosen a tight collar. NOTE: DO NOT use pliers or any other device to grip the tightening tool. It has been designed to allow you to achieve the proper torque on the collar without overtightening. Overtightening the collar can damage the connector and the radio. HLN6695_

( 2 ) Tig h t e n

(1) Squeeze Firmly Together Figure 2-52. Mini-UHF Connector Tool (As Shown on Mid Power)

(2) Tig h t e n HLN6695_

(1) Squeeze Firmly Together Figure 2-53. Mini-UHF Connector Tool (100W Radios Only) 6878215A01 2-42 Standard Configurations Antenna Installation 2.4.3 GPS Antenna Placement The GPS antenna (excluding the Motorcycle GPS antenna) must be placed at least, 3 feet 

(0.9 meters) away from any transmitting antenna, and the antenna must have a clear, unobstructed view of the sky for best performance. The length of the cabling must be taken into consideration before the installation is started. 2.4.4 GPS Connection To ensure a secure connection of the GPS antenna cable's SMA plug to a radio's SMA jack, the connector must be fully seated. If the connectors are not fully seated, the system will loosen. This should be done by hand to ensure excess force is not applied. GPS positions as shown in 

Figure 2-54 and Figure 2-55 are located in different positions. The mid power radio has the GPS antenna connector on the back of the radio while the 100W radio has the antenna connector on the front of the radio. NOTE: Applying excessive force with a tool can cause damage to the antenna or the connector 

(e.g. stripping threads, deforming the collar or connector, or causing the connector to twist in the housing opening and break). Figure 2-54. GPS Antenna Connector on the Back of the Mid Power Radio Figure 2-55. GPS Antenna Connector on the Front of the 100W Radio 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Speaker 2.5 Speaker 2-43

!

C a u t i o n DO NOT ground the radio's speaker leads. This system has a floating speaker output

(DC voltage on both leads); damage to the audio circuit will result if either lead is grounded or if they are shorted together. The speaker kit includes a trunnion bracket that allows the speaker to be mounted in a variety of ways. With the trunnion bracket, the speaker can mount permanently on the mounting surface or in accessible firewall areas. The trunnion allows the speaker to tilt for best operation. Mount the speaker out of the way so that it will not be kicked or knocked around by the vehicle occupants. Mount the speaker as follows:

1. Use the speaker mounting bracket as a template to mark the mounting hole locations. 2. Use the self-drilling screws provided to fasten the trunnion. 3. Attach the speaker and fasten to the trunnion with two wing screws. 4. Route the speaker wires under the carpet or floor covering, or behind the kick panels. Be sure the wires are out of the way and will not be snagged and broken by the occupants of the vehicle. 5. Do not submerse the 2-pin speaker connector in water nor place this connector in an area that could have standing water. Dashboard Trunnion Bracket Firewall OR Figure 2-56. Speaker Mounting MAEPF-25764-O 6878215A01 2-44 2.5.1 Standard Configurations Speaker Internal Speaker Disassembly NOTE: This configuration is only applicable for O2 Control Heads. You can disable the internal speaker of your radio by following the instructions below. Use the following procedure to disassemble your radio:

1. Unplug power, antenna, microphone and all accessories connections. If the radio is a remote-mount radio, disconnect the remote-mount control cable from the front of the transceiver. 2. Remove the four screws found on the control head with a Torx T-20 bit as shown in

Figure 2-57. Discard the screws. Figure 2-57. Removing the screws on the Control Head 3. Firmly grasp the front panel of the control head. Carefully remove the front housing assembly from the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-58. Note the position of the attached flex and do not pull on it excessively. Figure 2-58. Removing the Control Head 6878215A01 Standard Configurations Speaker 2-45 4. Put the control head face down on a clean, flat surface to avoid damaging it. Do not touch the o-ring on the back housing. 5. Carefully disconnect the speaker connector from the circuit board as shown in Figure 2-59. Figure 2-59. Disconnecting the Speaker Connector 6. Reattach the front housing assembly to the back housing assembly as shown in Figure 2-60. Make sure that the flex is returned to its original position and that the o-ring on the back housing assembly is not pinched. Figure 2-60. Reattaching the Control Head 7. Secure the front housing assembly back to the back housing assembly with four new screws using the Torx T-20 bit as shown in Figure 2-60. Apply 9 in. lbs. torque for each screw. 6878215A01 2-46 Standard Configurations Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6 Microphone Hang-Up Clip 2.6.1 Standard or O3 Control Head Hang-Up Clip The hang-up clip must be within reach of the operator(s) and close enough to the control head to prevent cable strain. Measure this distance before actually mounting the bracket. Since the bracket has a positive-detent action, the microphone can be mounted in any position. Use the hang-up clip as a template to locate the mounting holes. To avoid interference when removing the microphone, install the flathead screw in the top clip hole. Some microphone models require the grounding of the microphone clip in order for HUB operation to work correctly. Refer to the documentation that comes with your Motorola microphone model. NOTE: For multi-control head configuration where only one of the control heads has a microphone, the control heads without a microphone attached must have their HUB or Monitor pin

(J100-22) jumpered by a wire to GND (J100-1 or J100-14) for HUB operation to work. 2.7 RFID (Option) An APX mobile radio equipped with an RFID tag allows an alternate option for tracking the radio asset. Each RFID equipped radio has an RFID tag preprogrammed with the individual radios serial number (also found on the FCC label) as well as band and radio model information (see below for further info). RFID Tag Figure 2-61. RFID Location on Mid Power Radio RFID Tag Figure 2-62. RFID Location on APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio 6878215A01 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2-47 RFID Tag Figure 2-63. RFID Location on High Power Radio 6878215A01 2-48 2.7.1 RFID Reading Standard Configurations RFID (Option) To read an RFID tag using a UHF Gen 2 RFID reader (e.g. Motorolas MC9090-G), open an appropriate RFID read application, point the RFID reader at the tag and activate the reader's RFID antenna (e.g. pull Motorolas MC9090-G scanning trigger). RFID reader must be within 1 foot from tag in order to read. Two variables, Read Angle and Reader Orientation, aid in the distance needed to read and write to the RFID Tag. Read distance is independent of Tag Angle, but the reader should be as close to perpendicular to the tag as possible (Read Angle). As Read Angle increases past 60 degrees, read distance will begin to decrease; tag will become unreadable once Read Angle exceeds 90 degrees (see Figure 2-64 and Figure 2-66). RFID tag cannot be read through metal. The orientation of the reader (Reader Orientation) and the tag must be aligned to improve read and writability (see Figure 2-70). RFID Tag Read Angle O5 Figure 2-64. Read Angle for Mid Power Radio Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-65. Tag Angle for Mid Power Radio 6878215A01 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2-49 Read Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-66. Read Angle for APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-67. Tag Angle for APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Radio Read Angle RFID Tag NOTE: APX high power mobile radio is shown without handle to allow visibility of RFID tag. Figure 2-68. Read Angle for High Power Radio 6878215A01 2-50 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) Tag Angle RFID Tag Figure 2-69. Tag Angle for High Power Radio Reader Tag Reader Tag Figure 2-70. Examples of Reader and Tag Aligned (Reader Orientation) Reader Tag Figure 2-71. Example of Reader and Tag Misaligned (Reader Orientation) 6878215A01 Standard Configurations RFID (Option) 2-51 2.7.2 Programming RFID (If Equipped) The user can reprogram the tag (up to 12 ASCII characters when encoded to hexadecimal format) using any UHF Gen 2 capable RFID writer (e.g. Motorolas MC9090-G). NOTE: Follow read direction in Section 2.7.1 to optimized reprogramming. Table 2-10. Model Number Chart in 12-Digit ASCII Format Model Number Radio Tier/Band/Output Level Last Two Digits M30KSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SB-MP VHF M24KSS9PW1AN M22KSS9PW1AN APX Low Tier Mobile-MP VHF M30KTS9PW1AN APX Mobile SB-HP VHF M30QSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SB-MP UHF1 M30QTS9PW1AN APX Mobile SB-HP UHF1 M30SSS9PW1AN APX Mobile SB-MP UHF2 M20TSS9PW1AN APX Mobile DB-MP 7/800-MP VHF M30TXS9PW1AN APX Mobile DB-MP 7/800-HP VHF M30URS0PW1AN APX Mobile SB-MP 7/800 M22URS9PW1AN M24URS9PW1AN APX Low Tier Mobile-MP 7/800 D2 D8 D3 E2 E3 D2 R2 R3 F2 F8 Table 2-11. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power Characters Radio Band/Tier/Power F D E R T E S 1 2 3 4 5 7/800 VHF UHF 7/800 and VHF VHF and UHF UHF1 and UHF2 7/800 and UHF APX7000 APX7500 Mid Power APX7500 High Power APX6000 APX6500 Mid Power 6878215A01 2-52 2.8 Standard Configurations Completing the Installation Table 2-11. Serial Number with Radio Band/Tier/Power 6 7 8 9 APX6500 HighPower APX Low Tier Portable APX Low Tier Mobile MP APX Low Tier Mobile HP Completing the Installation Complete the installation by connecting the speaker to the accessory cable; verify the ignition sense wire is attached according to planned ignition sense; attach the accessory cable into J600; verify the control head is attached to either the TIB or the CAN extension cable; and then attach the power cable to the back of the transceiver. 6878215A01 Chapter 3 Universal Relay Controller Installation The Universal Relay Controller (URC) is an extension of and an orderable accessory for O7 or O9 control head. URC is used to control high power switching peripherals, e.g. lightbar. URC works on all lightbars which can be controlled by power application. URC is connected to the transceiver's GCAI port. The URC design consists of a microcontroller and uses 10 relays to control the switching device. A separate ground for isolation exists between the relay and MCU sections, which is provided by the use of iCoupler from Analog Devices. Each relay is connected to an output with 15 A fuse. The maximum load allowed on each output is 12 A. Two cables, each with the maximum of 60 A, can be used to connect to the input connector at the bus bar. Each cable is connected with a 60 A circuit breaker. One-wire EEPROM is employed to enable GCAI to recognize the URC accessory ID. CPS can be used to program the relay patterns. When installing URC, make sure to plan the installation carefully and leave additional room in the front and rear of the box for cabling and accessory connections; and also to the sides of the radio so that you may access and install the trunnion screws. The recommended mounting location for URC is in the car trunk, either next to the transceiver or within the area not further than 4.5 m away from the transceiver. Ensure that sufficient cooling is provided. Do not cover URC with baggage, blankets, etc.

!

C a u t i o n Do not backfeed power into URC. 3.1 Universal Relay Controller Mounting The mounting location must be accessible and visible. Select a location that permits routing the cable as directly as possible. NOTE: For optimum URC performance, orient the mounting trunnion as shown in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1. Universal Relay Controller Orientation An adjustable trunnion, which allows a number of mounting positions, is supplied for mounting the URC. The installation must not interfere with the operation of the vehicle or its accessories. 3-2 Universal Relay Controller Installation Universal Relay Controller Mounting Install the URC as follows:

1. Use the URC trunnion as a template to mark the mounting holes;

drill 5/32" holes. If mounting on a plastic surface, use a metal backing plate. 2. Attach the trunnion bracket using all four 10 16" x 5/8" self-tapping screws provided. 3. Temporarily install the URC (adjust for proper viewing angle) and fasten it to the trunnion with two wing screws. Test the installation to ensure that the unit is securely locked in place. USE FOUR MOUNTING SCREWS ON ALL INSTALLATIONS MOUNTING SURFACE IMPORTANT USE A METAL BACKING PLATE

(NOT SUPPLIED) IF MOUNTING TRUNNION ON PLASTIC OR UNSTABLE SURFACE ADJUST THE UNIVERSAL RELAY CONTROLLER TO DESIRED 

ANGLE AND SECURE WITH WING SCREWS TRUNNION DRILL FOUR 5/32'' HOLES IN MOUNTING SURFACE Figure 3-2. Universal Relay Controller Installation Exploded View 6878215A01 Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-3 3.2 O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3.2.1 Power Cable 1. Remove the cap nut of power cable gland assembly, and insert the power cable through the cap nut and neoprene seal in the cable gland body. Use power cable with either AWG 6 or AWG 8 only (recommended OD range of cable is 5.5 mm to 9 mm) that is able to withstand 80 A and 50 A respectively, to ensure water sealing of the controller. User can decide to install one or two power cables based on the requirements. The power cables (A+) are not supplied. 2. The loose end of the power cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then placed on the power lug and secured down by a set screw. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3. The other end of the power cable should be connected to circuit breaker (Motorola part number 40012006001) end which indicates "AUX" and then, to power supply on the other end which indicates "BAT", instead of connecting to power supply directly. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to install the second power cable, if required. 5. If only one power cable is installed, it is recommended to cover the other side of the power cable gland with power cable gland seal with tightening torque 18 lb-in. 3.2.2 Ground Cable 1. Remove the cap nut of ground cable gland assembly, insert the ground cable through the cap nut and then reassemble the cap nut. Use ground cable with AWG 14 only (recommended OD range of cable is 2 mm to 4 mm) that is able to withstand 5 A. The ground cables (A+) are not supplied. NOTE: The ground is used to switch the relays, and not act as a ground to the actual device being controlled. 2. The loose end of the ground cable with cable strip length 7.94 mm (5/16) is then connected to a two-pin terminal block. Both pins on the terminal block are inter-connected and either pin can be used. The cap nut is then reassembled with tightening torque 7 lb-in. Power Cable Gland Figure 3-3. Power and Ground Cable Glands Ground Cable Gland 6878215A01 3-4 Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly Cable Gland Body Neoprene Seal Cap Nut Counter Nut Gasket, Cable Gland 3.2.3 Wires Figure 3-4. Cable Gland Assembly with Gasket 1. Assemble the wires into the lightbar gasket retainer and lightbar gasket. The URC can support lightbars through control wires with outer diameter ranging from 

1.52 mm to 3.77 mm (0.06 to 0.148), with wire gages ranging from AWG 12 20. 2. Each individual loose wire (prior to stripping off the wire jacket) needs to be inserted one at a time through the chassis. Ensure the lightbar wire is straight before inserting the wire into the chassis. Each wire is sealed individually by the radial gasket seal. When a thick wire (i.e. AWG 14 wire or wire OD > 2.90 mm) is inserted through the chassis, there is potential torn at the rubber gasket. Remove the rubber gasket residual and continue to the next step. 3. Thin wires 2.5 mm and below should be dressed into the retention feature using a black stick

(see Figure 3-5); thick wires above 2.5 mm should be routed above the retention feature. Strip off the wire until 7.94 mm (5/16) after the wire is inserted into the URC, and install the wire into respective lightbar terminal block. 4. Cover the lightbar gasket retainer's hole with seal, gasket and ground cable gland, if no wire is inserted. WIRE RETENTION FEATURE LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER 2.5 mm AND BELOW LIGHTBAR WIRE WITH DIAMETER ABOVE 2.5 mm Figure 3-5. Wires Installation 6878215A01 Universal Relay Controller Installation O7/O9 Universal Relay Controller Cable Assembly 3-5 Black Stick Figure 3-6. Wire Installation with Black Stick 5. The lightbar gasket should be replaced at each reassembly of the wire. NOTE: Use of other cable gages except as recommended in this manual may result in water intrusion. Any reassembly of wire needs a new lightbar gasket replaced. If the current loading for one wire is higher than 12 A, the wires should be splitted before being assembled to the URC system. Wires kit (PMKN4109_) is provided to ease installation of the URC. Incorrect use of the wires kit, e.g. improper connection at external loose end wires, may impact the robustness of the URC.



Remove the wires and gasket residual inside the URC after the wire installation, before closing the top housing of the URC. 3.2.4 O7/O9 to URC Cable The O7/O9 to URC cable (Motorola part number 3064153H02) can be assembled either before or after reassembling the top housing. Assemble the RJ45 port of the cable into the RJ45 connector on the URC and turn the locking collar instead of cable, 90 degrees to the right to ensure it is locked properly. After that, test whether the cable is locked properly or not by trying to pull out the cable. Figure 3-7. O7/O9 to URC Cable Installation 6878215A01 3-6 Universal Relay Controller Installation Notes 6878215A01 Chapter 4 Options and Accessories Installation 4.1 Dash-Mount Accessory Installation NOTE: This configuration is not applicable for 100W radios. For dash-mounted configurations, the accessories must be installed through the accessory connector assembly that is located on the rear of the radio, adjacent to the power connector. Motorola-approved accessories are supplied with male terminals crimped to a 20-gauge wire specifically designed to fit the plug of the accessory connector assembly. Insert the male terminal into the accessory connector assembly in the appropriate location and connect the accessory connector assembly in the rear accessory port. Do not use other generic terminals in the plug. Generic terminals can cause electrical intermittencies and may cause damage to the plug. 4.1.1 Dash-Mount Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the footswitch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Open the accessory cable connector housing; remove the jumper wire. Connect the emergency switch wires to pins 14 and 15

(see Figure 4-1). Close the connector housing; route the finished cable from the switch location to the control head location. NOTE: The emergency footswitch should be attached with A+ unattached. 

A+ should be attached after successfully securing the screws in the connector. SPST NORMALLY CLOSED EMERGENCY SWITCH NOTE 1 PIN 14 PIN 15 NOTE 1: REMOVE BLACK JUMPER WIRE INSIDE ACCESSORY CONNECTOR HOUSING. INSERT WIRES FROM EMERGENCY SWITCH ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR 20 13 26 7 J2 IN DASH MOUNT J100 IN REMOTE MOUNT EMER GND 21 14 8 1 Figure 4-1. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency 

de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 4-2 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4.1.2 Dash-Mount Horn and Lights (External Alarms) Relays NOTE: For installations that use the horn/lights option, select a suitable location for mounting

(normally under the dash) and, referring to Figure 4-2, perform the following procedure:

1. Horn Relay Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 18 and 24 of the connector. 2. Lights Relay Connect the relay across the head lamp ON/OFF switch, typically found in the steering column. Open the accessory cable connector and connect the two control wires

(male pins) into locations 19 and 24 of the accessory connector. CONNECT ACROSS HORN RING SWITCH CONNECT ACROSS HEAD LAMP SWITCH SPST N.O. RELAY 12V COIL SPST N.O. RELAY 12V COIL VIP OUT 1 SWB+

VIP OUT 2 PIN 18 PIN 24 PIN 19 ACCESSORIES CONNECTOR 20 13 26 7 VIP OUT 2

(LIGHTS) VIP OUT 1

(HORN) SWB+

21 14 8 1 Figure 4-2. Horn/Light Wiring Diagram 4.2 Remote-Mount Accessory Installation Perform the following installation procedure:

1. Select an appropriate place to mount the option or accessory hardware. 2. Route the accessory-to-control head cables under floor coverings or behind panels so that the vehicle occupants do not snag or break the wires. 3. Attach wires from the accessory to the appropriate wire on the VIP cable (see Table 4-1 and Table 4-2).

!

C a u t i o n The radio is sold with correct accessory cables and jumpers in order to have emergency de-activated by default, regardless of the setting in CPS. However, if cables are not used, or if jumpers are removed without replacing with an emergency accessory button/switch at one of the accessory ports, the radio will power-up upon the application of A+. The display may not show an indication that the radio is on, and this can result in an incorrect operation of the radio as well as excessive current drain of the vehicles battery when the engine is off. 6878215A01 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-3 4.2.1 Emergency Pushbutton or Footswitch Installation Mount the switch using the hardware that comes with the kit. Connect the button/switch wires to a ground pin and the emergency pin, removing the default jumper wire in the rear accessory cable. The button/switch will short the pins when in-active. When the button/switch is pressed, its contact opens, the emergency path is un-ungrounded and pulled-high inside the radio transceiver, and detected by the processor. If an emergency accessory is used at either (or both) J2 connector and J626 connector, all jumper wires, shorting emergency to ground, must be removed so button/switch press can be detected. In additional to removing the default jumper wires in accessory cables, you must also remove a jumper part on the printed circuit board of the TIB, in order for the button/switch to be detected. On the TIB PCB (both mid power and high power use the same TIB) a zero-ohm jumper is placed by default so that the radio does not go into emergency when no cable is attached at either J2 or J626 in remote mount configuration. This jumper part, JU344, must be removed if either or both J2 and J626 will have any type of emergency cable and button/switch attached. Otherwise, the processor will never see emergency become un-grounded. Figure 4-3. Emergency Jumper Removal in Remote Mount 1. Turn-off power to the radio system. 2. Detach the TIB from the radio transceiver. 3. Detach the TIB flex. 4. Remove TIB PCB from the plastic housing using TORX T10 screwdriver. Refer to the disassembly procedure in the Basic Service Manual. 5. Located JU344, See diagram 6. Remove JU344 from the TIB PCB using a soldering gun. Clean off excess solder. 7. Reassemble the TIB following the Basic Service Manual procedure. Use 6-8 in-lbs torque on each screw. Remember to include the TIB O-ring gasket. 8. Re-attach the TIB flex. 9. Re-attach the TIB to the radio transceiver. 10. Apply 6-8 in-lbs of torque to each screw to secure the TIB to the radio transceiver. 6878215A01 4-4 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4.2.2 Horn (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the horn relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the horn ring switch, typically found in the steering column. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.3 Lights (External Alarm) Relay Installation Mount the light relay in a suitable location (normally under the dash). Connect the relay contacts across the head lamp ON/OFF switch. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+ pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. 4.2.4 Gunlock Installation The O7 or O9 control head can program up to three gunlocks through the programmable buttons. You can set the time for the momentary trigger using the time-out trigger button. Connect the relay contacts across the gunlock switch to install the gunlock. Connect the two control wires to a SW B+

pin and a VIP OUT pin on the VIP connector. It is recommended to install a failsafe/redundant bypass switch for the gunlock. It is suggested to use a separate timer switch or a manual push-on button switch to activate the gunlock. Connect the switch from the supply to the gunlock directly, as shown in Figure 4-4. Place the manual button at a suitable and reachable location, yet not easily seen. Car Battery GND Redundancy Wiring Momentary or time-out bypass manual switch Gunlock Transceiver control head and GND VIP Cable VIP OUT Figure 4-4. Gunlock Switch Redundancy Diagram GND 6878215A01 Options and Accessories Installation Remote-Mount Accessory Installation 4-5 4.2.5 Horn-Ring Transfer Configure the Horn Relay for either Negative Contact or Positive Contact as shown in section 6.3 of the siren/PA manual (6881093C18). Program the designated VIP-OUT line for Horn-Ring Transfer and program the designated VIP-IN line for Horn-Ring. Figure 4-5 shows wiring diagrams for connecting the Horn-Ring via a transfer relay for both negative and positive ground systems. Refer to the siren/PA manual (6881093C18) for more information. Horn Ring Break Here

+ 12V N.C. COM. N.O. To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring Any SPDT Relay with 12V Coil and Suitable Contact Ratings for Vehicle Installation Negative-Contact Horn-Ring Break Here To Horn N.C. COM. N.O. To DIG. GND at VIP Connector Under Hood Horn Relay Horn Horn Ring

+ 12V To Control Head VIP Output Programmed for Horn-Ring Transfer To SW B+ at VIP Connector To Control Head VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring Positive-Contact Horn-Ring Normally-Open Momentary Contact Pushbutton To VIP Input Programmed for Horn-Ring To DIG. GND at VIP Connector Pushbutton Connections NOTE: Locate Pushbutton in a Location Convenient to the Driver 4.2.6 Record Audio Out Jack of Transmit and Receive Audio Figure 4-5. Siren/PA Horn-Ring Connections The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-47) provides access to both the transmitted audio speech, as well as the received audio speech. This can be recorded with a standard tape recorder using a 2.5 mm connector. 4.2.7 Earphone Jack The use of Power Cable kit HKN6187_ (see Figure 2-47) provides the ability to use a standard earphone/headset instead of the external speaker. Once a cable is plugged into this 2.5 mm jack, the external speaker attached at the control head will turn mute. 6878215A01 4-6 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4.2.8 USB Data Cables It is recommended that the USB 1.5 meter data cable HKN6163_ is used for both dash mount configurations (at J2 connector) and for remote mount configurations (at J100 connector). This is because the HKN6163_ has the emergency jumper present, which is necessary for correct dash mount configurations. For interfacing at the MMP port, use Cable HKN6184_ which is a USB device cable. The USB 4 meter (15 feet) data cable enable HKN6172_ is recommended for remote mount configurations only (at J100). If the customer intends to use the HKN6172_ for dash mount configurations (at J2), the cables 

26-pin connector must be opened and an emergency jumper-wire placed across pins 14 and 15. Refer to Figure 4-1. 4.2.9 RS232 Cables The following are RS232 cables. Although not compatible with CPS radio reading or programming, they can be used for interfacing with RS232 accessories or RS232 computer programs. HKN6122_ is an RS232 serial COM port computer interface cable from J600 connector. HKN6160_ is a 6 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector. HKN6161_ is a 20 feet dash RS232 cable from J2 connector. HKN6183_ is a 4 meter cable from MMP connector. Vehicle Interface Port Overview The Vehicle Interface Port (VIP) allows the control head to operate outside circuits and to receive inputs from outside the control head. There are three VIP outputs which are used for relay control. There are also three VIP inputs which accept inputs from switches (remote mount only). 4.3 Function Radio Pin VIP Cable

(HKN6196_) Wire Color Number J400-1 RED SWB +

J400-2 GREEN GND J400-3 - NO PIN J400-4 - "VIP" detect: GPIO=HIGH J400-5 BLUE VIP_OUT_1 J400-6 YELLOW VIP_OUT_2 J400-7 BLACK VIP_OUT_3 J400-8 WHITE VIP_IN_1 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-9 ORANGE VIP_IN_2 (VIP_IN GPIO) J400-10 VIOLET VIP_IN_3 Figure 4-6. Remote Control Head Pinouts Figure 4-7. HKN6196_ VIP Connector Detail 6878215A01 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4-7 4.3.1 VIP Output Connections The VIP output pins are on the back of the control head (J100 and J400), or the rear accessory port

(J2), as shown in Figure 2-10, Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13, respectively. Use these connections to wire control relays. One end of the relay should connect to switched B+ voltage, while the other side connects to a software controlled ON/OFF switch inside the control head. The relay can be normally on or normally off depending on the configuration of the VIP outputs. There are three VIP output connections, as follows:

Table 4-1. VIP Output Connections J400 J2 J100 VIP OUT #

SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number SW B+ Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 1 2 3 Red 1 Red 1 Red 1 5 (Blue) 6 (Yellow) 7 (Black) 24 24 NA 18 19 NA SW B+ Pin Number 24 24 NA On/Off Switched Pin Number 18 19 NA The function of these VIP outputs can be field programmed in the control head. Typical applications for VIP outputs are external horn/lights alarm and horn ring transfer relay control. For further information on VIP outputs, see the control head programming manual. VIP OUT 1 and VIP OUT 2 can be accessed from either J100 or J400 connectors. This is to allow a previously wired VIP OUT at J2 to move easily to J100. However, when any cable is inserted into J400, J100 VIP OUTs are disabled. When installing relays to the VIP OUT lines, a diode is necessary to prevent damage to the transistor or MOSFET, due to back EMF when the field collapses on the relay coil. Some vendor relays already come with this diode built-in, and other relays require the customer to install it. Figure 4-8 shows the proper placement of the diode across the relay coil. The transistor or MOSFET is located inside the radio or the D.E.K. box. G D S SW B+

VIPout Protection Diode Relay N.C. N.O. Note:

To 'activate' a VIPOUT, you have to ground the VIPOUT, such that the current now flows thru the relay coil to GND through a MOSFET inside the radio or control head, which causes the relay wiper to toggle. The MOSFET of a VIPOUT should never be used to directly drive an accessory. The MOSFET should be used to control an external relay. Figure 4-8. Relay Coil NOTE: See Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering to order relays for your VIP OUT applications. Example relay hardware: TLN4533_ (relay without internal diode), HLN6969_ (relay with internal back EMF protection diode), and HKN4258_ (relay wiring cable). 6878215A01 4-8 Options and Accessories Installation Vehicle Interface Port Overview 4.3.2 VIP Input Connections The VIP input pins are only available on the back of the control head (remote mount). These connections control inputs from switches. One side of the switch connects to ground while the other side connects to a buffered input on the control head. The switch can be normally closed (NC) or normally open (NO) depending on the configuration of the VIP inputs. There are three VIP input connections, as follows:

Table 4-2. VIP Input Connections J400 J2 VIP IN #

1 2 3 Ground Pin Number 2 (green) 2 (green) 2 (green) On/Off Switched Pin Number Ground Pin Number On/Off Switched Pin Number 8 (white) 9 (orange) 10 (violet) NA NA NA NA NA NA NOTE: Remote Mount requires the VIP cable to be attached to J400.



MCH installations require the VIP inputs to be connected to the head assigned ID #1. See Section 2.2.2.5: Setting the Initial Control Head ID on page 2-29 for further information.

!

C a u t i o n APX mobile radios equipped with the following features are capable of transmitting automatically, even if the radio is turned off:

Automatic Vehicle Location Other Special Data Products All APX mobile have accessory connector pins 14 and 15 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the accessory connector, or otherwise failing to maintain a normally closed path, could, if left unchecked, drain the vehicle battery, and possibly cause transmissions to occur. 6878215A01 Options and Accessories Installation Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren 4-9 4.4 Compatibility of Emergency when Attaching a Siren When using emergency footswitch or pushbutton with siren/PA configuration, REMOVE pin 8

(emergency) from the siren connector of the HKN4363_ siren cable as follows:

Siren Cable Figure 4-9. Field adjustment for Emergency Operation with Siren Accessory 1. Remove the knob from the siren/PA cable connector. 2. Remove all four screws from the connector in the siren/PA cable. 3. Open the connector cap and locate pin 8. 4. Using the contact removal tool (6684690C02), remove pin 8 from the connector. 5. Put the connector cap in place and proceed to reinstall the four screws and the knob. Pin 8 A B 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 28 27 26 25 24 23 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 Figure 4-10. Location for Pin 8 6878215A01 4-10 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) (All Models Except 100W) 4.5 Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2)

(All Models Except 100W) The APX mobile accessory connector assembly is mounted on the right rear of the radio, opposite the antenna and adjacent to the power connector. It is fastened to the radio via jackscrews and held together by the two cover screws. It is a multi-functional connector that allows for many different types of adaptations. All approved accessory wires are securely strain-relieved through the exiting slots at the back of the accessory connector assembly. The terminations that are supplied with all accessories are designed to be fully engaged and locked into the plug connector (6680163F01). They can also be detached for service with the assistance of a terminal removal tool. The accessory connector assembly can be serviced multiple times for future installation upgrades. The accessory connector assembly, supplied with every APX mobile dash-mounted radio, is equipped with a 26-pin plug assembly, two covers, two jackscrews, two cover screws, one emergency jumper, one ignition sense cable assembly, and one speaker pigtail. The jumper is provided to complete the circuit for emergency mode. If this circuit becomes open, the radio will be set to emergency mode. 39800834F03 is the crimping pin part number for use with any wires used inside the accessory cable connector. 4.5.1 Disassembly and Assembly 4.5.1.1 Disassembly 1. Disconnect the negative terminal from the vehicles battery. Make sure that the battery cable is secured such that it will not power the vehicles electrical system. 2. Unscrew both jackscrews completely. 3. Pull the accessory connector assembly out from the radio. 4. Loosen both cover screws, but do not remove them completely. 5. Pull the jackscrews away from the plug and hold them back. 6. Pry apart the accessory connector assembly covers. 7. Attach any new wire to its proper location by pushing in the male terminal. When you hear a pop, the wire is engaged. To verify that the wire is engaged, tug gently on the wire and be sure it does not come out. Do not overload the wire: severe damage will result to the plug. 6878215A01 Options and Accessories Installation Accessory Connector Assembly Details (P2) (All Models Except 100W) 4-11 4.5.1.2 Assembly 1. Place the plug in one cover. Be sure that the flange of the plug is in the slot of the cover. 

See Figure 4-11. 2. Push the jackscrew through the plug to hold it in. 3. Position each wire across the strain-relief features in the cover. Avoid damaging loads on the plug by allowing some slack in each wire in the accessory connector assemblys wire chamber. 4. Place the second cover onto the plug. Be sure that the flange is protruding through both covers. Figure 4-11. Exploded View of Accessory Connector Assembly (HLN6863_) 5. Squeeze the covers together bending the wires in the strain-relief features. You may need a pair of pliers to seat the assembly covers. 6. Once the covers are fully seated, fasten them with the cover screws. Tighten the screws firmly but do not over-tighten them. Be sure none of the wires are pinched. 7. Reattach the accessory connector assembly to the back of the radio and fasten it by 

finger-tightening the jackscrews to prevent any loosening. NOTE: See APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (6875964M01) for more detailed descriptions of these pins and other connectors located in the APX mobile radio. 6878215A01 4-12 Options and Accessories Installation Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option 4.5.2 Adapter Cable If you are planning on installing an APX mobile radio as a replacement for an ASTRO Spectra radio, the following adapter cables are available:

Part Number Description HKN6158_ Cable, Audio Adapter Kit HKN6159_ Cable, Data Adapter Kit NOTE: The adaptor cables can only be connected to J2 in the rear of the transceiver. Use the HKN6158_ audio adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and used the rear cable pins as shown in Figure 4-12. SPKR LO -

IGNITION VIP OUT 2 N.C. GND SPKR HI +

SWB+

EMER 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 N.C. VIP OUT 1 N.C. MIC HI PTT DISC. AUD N.C. Figure 4-12. Rear Accessory Connector Audio Configuration Use the HKN6159_ data adapter kit cable if your vehicle was formerly wired for an ASTRO Spectra or ASTRO Spectra Plus radio, and used the rear cable pins as shown in Figure 4-13. SPKR LO -

IGNITION VIP OUT 2 CTS-ASTRO RTS_DCE DIG GND SPKR HI +

SWB+

EMER 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 BUS+

VIP OUT 1 BUS-

RTS-ASTRO CTS_DCE TX-ASTRO RX_DCE RX-ASTRO TX_DCE BUSY Figure 4-13. Rear Accessory Connector Data Configuration You must attach the correct adapter. Installing the wrong adapter may cause damage to the data communication circuitry inside your radio. If you are unsure of the pinout of your former wiring harness, please consult your ASTRO radio installation technician. 4.6 Memory and Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option For the installation or removal of the Memory or 3-Day Secure Key Retention Options 

(MHLN6999_ and MHLN7000_), see the APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (6875964M01). NOTE: The Three-Day Secure Key Retention Option is not applicable for APX 2500/APX 4500. 6878215A01 Chapter 5 Motorcycle Radio Installation NOTE: The motorcycle radio installation is not applicable for 100W radios, APX 4500 radios and O9 control heads. 5.1 Motorcycle Radio Description The motorcycle model includes all the same components in the standard radio, with the exceptions listed in the model charts in the APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (6875964M01). The following paragraphs describe the unique items provided with the motorcycle models. NOTE: The APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (6875964M01) includes complete parts lists and parts numbers for all parts shown in the exploded views in this chapter.



A small label is included with the motorcycle radio, which can be placed on the radio to identify it as a motorcycle radio. The label should be placed on a flat and protected area to avoid damage during handling. See Figure 5-1. Figure 5-1. Identification of a Motorcycle Radio by Using a Label 5.1.1 Transceiver Enclosure The transceiver is mounted in the weather-resistant enclosure that consists of a bottom housing and a hinged top cover. The top cover has a locking latch that requires a key to open. The enclosure is mounted above the rear motorcycle wheel, oriented so that the lock is forward and the hinged cover opens toward the rear of the motorcycle. The bottom housing has a grommeted hole for cable entry and weep holes to permit water drainage. The enclosure is mounted on the motorcycle with a universal mounting plate and shock and vibration isolators. A large, braided ground-strap (installed between the mounting plate bolts and the motorcycle frame) grounds the transceiver. 5.1.2 Control/Display Unit All radio functions, except push-to-talk (PTT), are activated from the control head, which also is weather-resistant. The control head and the external speaker are mounted for easy access near the center of the handlebars. The control head is positioned for unobstructed viewing, and it may be tilted on the horizontal axis for ease of viewing. The microphone cable port on the front of the control head is plugged and is not used. 5-2 Motorcycle Radio Installation Motorcycle Radio Description 5.1.3 Control Head Cable The control-head cable connects the control head to the transceiver. The cable is routed along the motorcycles frame and has weather-resistant connections at both ends. Excess cable is coiled under the transceiver inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Each end of the cable is strain-relieved with jackscrews at the control head and the transceiver.

The cable is shielded to reduce the effects of radio frequency interference and ignition sense noise. 5.1.4 Microphone A weather-resistant, palm microphone and coiled cord plug into a pigtail connector on the control cable. The microphone attaches to a hang-up bracket located within easy reach of the motorcycle rider. The coiled cord is long enough to be operated by someone standing next to the motorcycle, yet short enough to not interfere with the motorcycles steering or operation. 5.1.5 Keypad Mic The Mobile Keypad Microphone (Mic) is a full keypad handheld microphone. The keypad on this microphone is intended to assist in navigating through the menus on its parent device, as well as entering information such as phone numbers and menu picks. 5.1.6 External Speaker A 3.2-ohm, 10-watt-rated-audio-power, external speaker is mounted on the front of the motorcycle. The speaker cable is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. A sealed, weather-resistant, speaker-muting (toggle) switch is mounted on top of the speaker. The external speaker connects to the rear accessory connector of the transceiver. 5.1.7 Headset Capability The motorcycle radio is compatible with headset accessories that would provide hands-free operation of the radio. Motorola does not manufacture headset equipment, but provides the interconnection for headset equipment with the motorcycle radio. Aftermarket headset equipment is available through Motorola (see Appendix A: Replacement Parts Ordering).

!

C a u t i o n To avoid possible injury to hearing, the audio setting in the mobile radio MUST be confirmed, if the Motorola mobile radio is used with any motorcycle helmet headset. See CPS Help for details. 5.1.8 Antenna 5.1.9 The antenna(s) are mounted on top of the transceivers weather-resistant enclosure. 

The enclosures metal lining acts as the antennas ground plane. Ignition Sense (ACC) Wire The ignition sense wire connects to the motorcycles fuse box and is routed along the motorcycle frame to the transceivers rear accessory connector. The radio is wired so that transmission is inhibited if the motorcycles ignition sense switch is off. 

If the PTT switch is pressed with the ignition sense off, a low-frequency tone sounds. The receiver is controlled by the control head on/off switch. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview 5-3 Installation Overview 5.2 5.2.1 General All APX mobile radios are tested and inspected before shipment. It is, however, suggested that the transmitter frequency, deviation, and power output be checked at the time of installation. It is the license holders responsibility to ensure that the operating parameters of his station comply with applicable laws governing radio communications equipment. For tests and alignment procedures, refer to the appropriate service manual (refer to Related Publications on page vi). Generally, the installation of the motorcycle radio takes place in the following parts:

Mounting the universal mounting plate and related hardware at the rear of the motorcycle;

Mounting the control head, speaker, microphone, and related hardware forward on the motorcycle;

Routing the power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable to the weather-resistant enclosure;

Mounting the weather-resistant enclosure and radio chassis, and connecting the cables;

Mounting the antenna(s) to the weather-resistant enclosure. A universal mounting plate, supplied by Motorola, is first mounted to either a motorcycle carrier at the rear of the motorcycle or to the rear frame of the motorcycle itself. The mounting procedures for the universal mounting plate vary from motorcycle to motorcycle. Therefore, the procedures given in this manual for installing the mounting plate may not specifically apply, but are provided for guidance. The control head, speaker, and microphone are mounted forward on the motorcycle, on or near the steering column. There are several possible mounting configurations which use a combination of Motorola and customer-built brackets. These configurations are outlined in this manual. Because of the large number of motorcycle makes and models in existence, the customer-built brackets are necessary to tailor the mounting of the Motorola equipment to the particular motorcycle being used. Suggestions for customer-built brackets are given in this manual. The power cable, control-head cable, speaker cable, and ignition sense cable are routed to the weather-resistant enclosure position. The enclosure and the radio chassis are then mounted. Special care is required when connecting cables to the radio equipment within the enclosure. 6878215A01 5-4 5.2.2 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview Important Installation Hints Consider the following when mounting the radio components:

Excess lengths of control-head, power, ignition sense, and speaker cables must be routed in the enclosure as shown in Figure 5-16. All components must be mounted securely in order to withstand the constant and sometimes severe vibration experienced on a motorcycle. No cantilever action, which could cause severe vibration, should be generated in the mounting hardware. The control head and microphone must be placed for ease of accessibility by the motorcycle operator. Forward components (control head, microphone, and speaker) should not interfere with visual or physical access to controls and instruments. Forward components should not interfere with the handling of the motorcycle. Cabling between the control head and the radio chassis should be run to minimize interference with operator movements. The weather-resistant enclosure should be placed to avoid any interference with the motorcycle operator. Electrical continuity must be present through the enclosure shock mounts to the motorcycle frame for proper electrical and RF grounding. The antenna(s) are designed for mounting on the top of the weather-resistant enclosure. Only the supplied microphone mounting clip should be used to ensure secure mounting of the microphone. This clip has a very strong spring to ensure positive retention of the microphone over rough terrain. Also, there must be electrical continuity from this clip to the motorcycle frame for DC grounding. Direct access to the microphone should be provided from both sides of the motorcycle. Sufficient slack in the microphone coiled cord should be allowed so as not to impede steering. Mounting hardware must be stainless steel to prevent corrosion. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, ensure that the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installation Overview 5-5 5.2.3 Parts Identification The following installation procedures refer to Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-17. Detailed descriptions of the mounting hardware used in each procedure are provided in parts lists located in the exploded views located in the APX Mobile Basic Service Manual (Motorola publication part number 6881096C73). Those parts supplied by Motorola are contained in one of the following kits:

Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Microphone Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Mute Switch Motorcycle Weather-Resistant Speaker with Keypad Mic Motorcycle Hardware Kit SECURENET or Motorcycle Hardware Kit Motorcycle Power Cable Kit Motorcycle Mounting Kit Weather-Resistant Enclosure (Black) Antenna 5.2.4 Order of Installation Before starting the installation, familiarize yourself with the mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2 through Figure 5-17). Perform the installation procedures in the order that follows. Install the universal mounting plate on the motorcycle. Install the control head and speaker. Install the microphone hang-up clip. Install antenna base and cable onto enclosure. Install the cables. Install the weather-resistant enclosure on the universal mounting plate. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Route the cables inside the weather-resistant enclosure. Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure. 8. 9. Install the antenna(s) on the enclosure. 6878215A01 5-6 5.3 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Universal Mounting Plate Installing the Universal Mounting Plate The universal mounting plate, supplied with the motorcycle radio, must be mounted on the motorcycle first. It provides the base on which the weather-resistant enclosure is to be mounted. 

The method used for mounting the plate depends on the make and model of the motorcycle and whether the plate is mounted to a carrier or to the motorcycle chassis. After the plate has been securely mounted to the motorcycle, mounting the weather-resistant enclosure onto the plate is straightforward. Figure 5-2 illustrates the universal mounting plate mounted to a motorcycle carrier. Since there are so many makes and models of motorcycles and motorcycle carriers, it is impossible to give specific step-by-step instructions for mounting the universal mounting plate. However, noting the following considerations will aid in the installation procedure. A minimum of holes are predrilled into this plate as supplied. Mounting holes must be drilled as required for the particular motorcycle on which the plate is being mounted. The universal mounting plate should be mounted on the motorcycle in such a manner that the later mounting of the weather-resistant enclosure will not interfere with the motorcycle seat back, with any other obstacles, or with the motorcycle operator. The enclosure may be temporarily bolted to the universal mounting plate and the unit positioned on the motorcycle to ensure the above criteria are met. To ensure a good grounding path from the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle carrier or frame, stainless steel lock washers must be used with the mounting hardware in two areas to score through the paint on the universal mounting plate and on the carrier or frame, thereby, providing good electrical contact with the underside of the motorcycle carrier or motorcycle frame. Figure 5-2. Universal Mounting Plate Installation (Part of Radio Enclosure Kit) Follow the procedures below to mount the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle 

(see Figure 5-2). 1. Determine the mounting position for the mounting plate. 2. Determine whether stainless steel spacers are required for clearance in mounting the plate. 3. Drill four 9/32-inch holes in the mounting plate and the corresponding motorcycle carrier or chassis for mounting the plate. 4. Attach the universal mounting plate to the motorcycle using four machine screws, eight lock washers, and four nuts. Tighten screws securely. The lock washers must cut through the paint on the plate and motorcycle carrier or frame to ensure a good ground path. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-7 5.4 Installing the Speaker and Control Head NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 2-44. The control head mounting location and configuration is determined largely by the make and model of motorcycle. Two different mounting configurations are described below. One involves mounting the speaker and control head together as a unit using the combination speaker/control-head bracket

(shown in Figure 5-4) supplied by Motorola. Alternately, the control head may be mounted by itself using a smaller control-head bracket supplied by Motorola. In this case, the speaker is mounted elsewhere. This section outlines installation procedures for each configuration mentioned above. The customer (or installer) is in the best position to determine the most appropriate mounting configuration for the control head and speaker based on the particular motorcycle on which the equipment is to be mounted.

!

C a u t i o n When determining its location, position the control head so that it is clearly visible and within easy reach of the motorcycle operator. Figure 5-3. Motorcycle Control Head Cabling (3075217A01) 6878215A01 5-8 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5.4.1 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Figure 5-4 illustrates the combination speaker/control head bracket. This combination bracket is used only when the control head and speaker are to be mounted as a unit. Also illustrated in Figure 5-4 is a handlebar-mounting bracket which may be required if the combination speaker/

control-head bracket cannot be easily mounted to the motorcycle. In this case the 

handlebar-mounting bracket is mounted to the motorcycle, and the combination bracket is then mounted to the handlebar-mounting bracket. Figure 5-4. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-9 Provision has been made on the combination speaker/control-head bracket for mounting the microphone hang-up clip. If that mounting is desired, the hang-up clip must be attached to the bracket before installing the control head and speaker. See Section 5.6: Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip on page 5-14 for the hang-up clip procedure. Install the speaker and control head as described below. 1. Determine the location where the speaker/control head is to be mounted. Consider how the speaker/control-head bracket may be mounted, and whether or not a handlebar-mounting bracket is needed. Take care to select a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. NOTE: The angle at which the handlebar-mounting bracket or the speaker/control-head bracket is mounted to the motorcycle determines the firing angle of the speaker. If the handlebar-mounting bracket is needed, install it first. 2. 3. Mount the speaker/control-head bracket, either directly to the motorcycle, or, if used, to the handlebar-mounting bracket, using four stainless-steel machine screws, lock washers, and nuts. 4. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the speaker/control head bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 5. Mount the speaker on the speaker/control-head bracket, using two machine screws and lock washers. Torque these screws to 20 in-lbs. 6. Attach the control-head cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. This connection must be made before you mount the control head in the bracket.

(Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 7. Mount the control head to the bracket, using two machine screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 8. Adjust the control head viewing angle by loosening its mounting screws and rotating the control head to the desired angle. Then, retighten screws to 20 in-lbs torque. This concludes the speaker/control-head installation. 5.4.2 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together Some motorcycles provide a console for mounting radio equipment. This console is attached to the top of the fuel tank. With the use of a mounting bracket, screws, nuts, and lock washers, the combination speaker/control-head bracket can be mounted to this console. Figure 5-5 illustrates this type of mounting. The console attachment screws must be removed, and the console must be lifted slightly from the fuel tank to gain access in order to attach mounting hardware, and to route cables later. In this installation, the microphone (mic), mic hang-up bracket, and mic extension bracket will interfere with handlebar travel. Installation using this method is the same as in Section 5.4.1: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 5-8. 6878215A01 5-10 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-5. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together f 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-11 5.4.3 Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately It may be necessary to use the smaller control head bracket (part number 07-80127N02) and mount the speaker and microphone hang-up clip in another location on the motorcycle. Before installing the control head using the bracket described above, the control-head end of the control-head cable should be temporarily fastened to the control head, and the control head fastened to its bracket. Motorola-supplied spacers and the mic-cable bracket are required to mount the control head to the handlebar. This mic-cable bracket has holes to mount the microphone-cable connector. Follow these procedures when mounting the smaller control-head bracket:

1. Determine the location at which the control head is to be mounted. Take care to choose a location that is not only mechanically convenient, but is located for ease of operation. 2. Securely mount the Motorola-supplied spacers, mic-cable bracket, and small control-head bracket to the handlebars. 3. Mount the 9-pin D-connector end of the motorcycle control-head cable to the mic-cable bracket, using two machine screws, flat washers, and nuts. (Cable routing directions appear later in this section.) 4. Attach the control-head end of the cable to the control head and tighten the locking screws on the connector. 5. Mount the control head to the small control-head bracket, at the proper viewing angle, using two wing screws. Tighten firmly. This concludes the control-head installation. 6878215A01 5-12 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head Figure 5-6. Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately 5.4.4 Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately The control head may be mounted to the fuel tank console using the smaller control-head bracket and spacers/hardware. In this configuration, the microphone cable connector may be attached directly to the console, eliminating the need for a custom bracket. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker and Control Head 5-13 Figure 5-7. Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately Installation is the same as detailed in Section 5.4.2: Fuel Tank Console Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Together on page 5-9 and Section 5.4.3: Handlebar Installation with Speaker and Control Head Mounted Separately on page 5-11. 6878215A01 5-14 5.5 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Speaker Installing the Speaker NOTE: To disable the internal speaker of the O2 Control Head, please refer to Section 2.5.1: Internal Speaker Disassembly on page 2-44. Use the following procedure when the speaker is mounted separate from the control head. The speaker bracket supplied with the speaker may be used alone if a suitable location can be found, or if necessary, a customer-supplied bracket may be fabricated for mounting the speaker. 1. Determine the location in which the speaker is to be mounted and whether there is a requirement for a customer-supplied bracket. 2. Fabricate a bracket if required. Use the Motorola-supplied speaker bracket as a template for drilling mounting holes. Also drill holes in the fabricated bracket for mounting to the motorcycle. 3. Mount the fabricated bracket to the motorcycle chassis. 4. Mount the Motorola-supplied bracket to the fabricated bracket using two machine screws, flat washers, lock washers, and nuts. 5. Mount the speaker to the speaker bracket using two wing screws. Directions for speaker cable routing appear later in this section. Speaker mounting is now complete. 5.6 Installing the Microphone Hang-Up Clip Install the hang-up clip either on the supplied microphone extension bracket or on the side of the speaker/control head bracket. Both methods are shown in Figure 5-4. Determine the mounting location and install as described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Wherever the hang-up clip is mounted, it must be DC grounded for proper operation. After mounting the clip, be sure there is electrical continuity between the clip and the motorcycle chassis. 5.6.1 Extension Bracket Mounting Using this method, you can mount the clip so that it faces the operator. 1. Attach the bracket to the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, four lock washers, and two nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 2. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 3. Fasten the hang-up clip to the extension bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. 4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs torque. 5.6.2 Speaker/Control Head Bracket Side Mounting Attach the hang-up clip to the left side of the speaker/control-head bracket using two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts as shown in Figure 5-4. Torque nuts to 20 in-lbs. torque. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base and Cables 5-15 5.6.3 Other Hang-Up Clip Mounting To mount the microphone hang-up clip in another location, a customer-supplied bracket may be used. Suggested locations include the handlebars, fuel-tank console, or any location which provides easy access to the microphone without blocking controls and indicators and without interfering with motorcycle handling. See Figure 5-5, Figure 5-6, and Figure 5-7 for alternative microphone hang-up clip mounting methods. 1. Fabricate a bracket, then secure it to the motorcycle. 2. Use two machine screws, lock washers, and nuts to secure the hang-up clip to the customer-supplied bracket. Ensure that the microphone clip is DC grounded to the motorcycle chassis (a grounding lug and strap are provided in the hang-up clip kit for this purpose) this is essential for proper radio operation. 5.7 Installing Antenna Base and Cables NOTE: Antenna hole placement and cable routing in 7/800, VHF and UHF antenna manuals are not applicable for the APX Series.



The GPS antenna assembly must be done after the removal of the metal liner but before reinstalling the APX Series liner. 1. Open the top cover of the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Uninstall the metal liner that is shipped attached to the weather-resistant enclosure. This liner has one depressed area at the top of the enclosure liner just toward the rear of the enclosure. This metal liner is not used with APX Series products. 3. Place the metal liner with two round, depressed areas toward the enclosure hinge and 5/8 hole near the front of the housing, inside the top cover, and align the six slots in the metal liner with the screw holes in the top housing. 4. The metal liner of the enclosures top cover acts as a ground plane for the antenna. 5. Locate the two round, depressed areas about 3 inches in diameter in the metal liner near the enclosure hinge. Referring to Figure 5-8, these areas are either Band 1 or Band 2 depending on the antenna port they align to. Refer to band markings on radio for the proper antenna port location. For the GPS antenna, use the 5/8 hole near the front of the housing near the lock. Top Cover for APX Radios Band 1 Antenna Port Antenna Port Band 2 Antenna Port Band 1 Antenna ASTRO 25 Subscribers APX 2500/APX 4500 Figure 5-8. Location of Band 1 or Band 2 (Depending on the Antenna Port They Align to) GPS Band 2 Antenna 6878215A01 5-16 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base and Cables 6. These holes in the metal liner is used as a template to mark the position of the hole(s) to be drilled at the top cover. Follow the below guidelines for the various options.

- Single Band Refer to your APX radio (see Figure 5-9 or Figure 5-10) and see if your 

single band antenna is in the position of Band 1 or 2. Depending on which location your antenna port is mark a hole in the appropriate antenna position only. Refer to Figure 5-8.

- Dual Band Mark a hole in both the Band 1 and Band 2 Antenna position as seen on Figure 5-8.

- GPS Mark a hole in the GPS Antenna position as seen on Figure 5-8. Antenna Band Label Band 2 Antenna Port Band 1 Antenna Port GPS Antenna Port Antenna Port Figure 5-9. Antenna Band Identification GPS Antenna Port Figure 5-10. APX 2500/APX 4500 Antenna Band Identification 7. Remove the metal liner from the top cover. 8. For Band 1 and Band 2 positions, use the Motorola RPX-4378A Hole-Cutting Saw or equivalent, and carefully drill a 3/4-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. For the GPS carefully drill a 9/16-inch hole at the marked location from the inside of the cover until the saw bottoms out. The saw should clean a neat circle to assure good contact between the antenna and the housing. IMPORTANT:

For proper seating of the antennas, deburr and scrape any foreign matter from both sides of the hole, being careful not to mar the finish of the shell. 9. Clean the mounting surface around the hole to remove dirt and wax. 10. Refer to the Motorcycle GPS Instruction Manual for further installation instruction for the GPS. GPS must be mounted before the APX metal liner is installed. 11. Reinstall the APX metal liner (see Figure 5-8) with the cable clamps provided in the weather-

resistant housing. If installing GPS, the GPS coaxial cable must be fed through the hole in the APX metal liner before the liner can be placed onto the housing. Then route the GPS Coaxial Cable through the cable clamps before tightening the hex screws as installing the cable after that is difficult due to the connector. See Figure 5-11 for GPS Cable Routing. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing Antenna Base and Cables 5-17 Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Figure 5-11. Routing the Coaxial Cable for GPS Connector 12. Attach the 7/800, VHF or UHF antenna base per Antenna Installation Manual. IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX series. 13. Route the coaxial cable for the 7/800, VHF or UHF antenna(s) through the cable clamps per Figure 5-12 for Band 1 and Figure 5-13 for Band 2.

!

C a u t i o n Be sure to observe the correct routing of the antenna cable. Failure to do so can damage the cable. Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio Band 1 Figure 5-12. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 1 6878215A01 5-18 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Antenna Cable Clamp Coaxial Cable Attach to Antenna Connector on Radio Band 2 Figure 5-13. Routing the Coaxial Cable for Band 2 14. After routing cable, allow enough of the cable to reach the radios antenna connector and cut off any excess length of the cable. 15. Install the connector per Antenna Installation Manual. 5.8 5.9 Installing the Antenna IMPORTANT:

Antenna Placement and Cable Routing as described inside the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable for the APX radio series. Refer to information listed below. Connect the appropriate antenna connectors to the antenna receptacles on the radio. Tighten the coupling until fully engaged. Cable Routing Five cables must be installed to interconnect the components of the radio system as shown in Figure 5-14. The antenna cable is routed away from the other cables inside the enclosures hinged cover (see Section 5.7 on page 5-15). The four remaining cables, routed along the motorcycle frame, are described in the following paragraphs. NOTE: Antenna Hole Placement and Cable Routing information in the Antenna Installation Manual is not applicable to the APX series.



Removal of the fuel tank and seat from the motorcycle will facilitate routing the cables along the frame. Motorcycles with consoles attached to fuel tanks require routing cables between console and fuel tank. In this case the tank is not removed. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Cable Routing 5-19 CONTROL HEAD CABLE SPEAKER/

CONTROL HEAD SPEAKER CABLE MICROPHONE CONTROL HEAD CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE POWER CABLE ANTENNA CABLE BATTERY FUSE BLOCK IGNITION CABLE SPEAKER CABLE CHASSIS GROUND FUSED POWER CABLE Figure 5-14. Cable Routing 1. Speaker Cable runs from the speaker to the accessory-cable connector inside the weather-resistant enclosure. 2. Control Cable runs from the rear of the control head to the front of the transceiver inside the enclosure. Ignition Sense (Red) Wire Portion of Accessory Cable runs from the ignition sense fuse terminal of the fuse box to the rear area inside the enclosure. The lug for attaching the ignition sense wire is contained on the accessory cable. 3. 4. Power Cable The red, unterminated end runs from the positive terminal of the battery to the power connector that plugs in the rear of the transceiver. Lugs for attaching the red and black leads are contained in the motorcycle power-cable kit. The black, unterminated end runs from a suitable motorcycle chassis ground to the power connector. DO NOT connect the black lead directly to the negative battery post. You may route the cables in any order. As you route each cable, temporarily fasten it at both ends. When all cables have been run, permanently fasten the cables with appropriate cable tie wraps. Observe the following during routing and hook-up:

1. Route the cables so that none interfere with motorcycle operation. 2. Fasten the cables with supplied nylon tie wraps. The wraps should be firmly installed at frequent intervals along the cable length in such a manner that motorcycle vibration will not cause metal fatigue and subsequent breakage of the cable wires.

6878215A01 5-20 Motorcycle Radio Installation Cable Routing 3. Take care to position cables away from parts of the motorcycle that get hot. Bundle excess cable length inside the weather-resistant enclosure as discussed later in Section 5.11: Transceiver and Cabling Installation on page 5-22. The fifth cable is the microphone with coiled cord. Plug the 9-pin D-connector end of the coiled cord into its mating connector, which was attached near the control head discussed in an earlier paragraph. Tighten the coiled-cord-retention screws. Insert the S-hook strain relief (terminated to the coiled cord) into the hole in the mounting bracket. Slide the microphone into the microphone hang-up bracket. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 5-21 5.10 Installing the Weather-Resistant Enclosure 7 7 2 3 4 8 5 6 1 Item No. Description Item No. TO MOTORCYCLE CHASSIS GROUND Description 1 2 3 4 Universal Mounting Plate Machine Screw Lockwasher Flat Washer 5 6 7 8 Flat Rubber Washer Shouldered Rubber Washer 7-1/2-inch Ground Strap Ground Strap Figure 5-15. Weather-Resistant Enclosure Installation 1. Remove the radio-mounting plate by removing four screws, lock washers, and flat washers. 2. The weather-resistant enclosure is mounted to the universal mounting plate using shock mounts. Assemble the shock-mount components exactly as shown in Figure 5-15. Be sure to install ground straps between the shock-mount and the transceiver trunnion mount, and install one 7-1/2-inch ground strap between the right rear mount and the enclosure lids antenna ground plane 0 (shown in Figure 5-15 and in Figure 5-17). 3. The order of assembly is important to ensure proper shock mount operation. All components are supplied with the mounting kit. The five 7- 1/2-inch straps are used on the rear and front shock mounts four from shock mount to trunnion, and one from the shock mount to the lids antenna ground plane. NOTE: Grounding through the power-supply cable is NOT sufficient. Whether the radio transceiver is mounted to a carrier or the chassis itself, the transceiver MUST be properly grounded to the motorcycle chassis. The ground strap supplied with the installation kit may have to be used to ensure a good RF ground path from the radio transceiver to the motorcycle chassis. Install the 3-foot ground strap on one of the front shock mounts. Route it through the cable-

routing hole and connect the other end to the motorcycle frame (see Figure 5-15). 4. DO NOT connect the ground strap directly to the negative battery post.

!

!

W A R N I N G 6878215A01 5-22 Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver and Cabling Installation 5. The diagram of the shock mount is shown loosely assembled. After the hex screws are tightened, the rubber washers are compressed to fasten the weather- resistant enclosure securely to the universal mounting plate. 6. Figure 5-17 is an exploded view of the enclosure; it shows details that will help to understand how the enclosure is mounted. After the enclosure is completely mounted, check for proper ground connectioncontinuity between the antenna ground plane and the motorcycle frame. 5.11 Transceiver and Cabling Installation After the weather-resistant enclosure has been installed, the radio chassis (transceiver) is installed in the enclosure and then appropriate cables are connected. However, before the transceiver can be installed, the cabling must be properly positioned in the enclosure. 5.11.1 Installing Cabling in the Enclosure Position the cabling in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows:

1. Run the speaker, power, control-head, and ignition sense cables into the enclosure. 2. Lay the excess cable length between the radio mounting bosses in an S configuration as shown in Figure 5-16. Do not coil any excess cable. Use the supplied tie wraps to bundle cable as shown. NOTE: If the extra cable length is not sufficient to match the illustrated cable routing, then match the illustration as closely as possible. 3. Connect the speaker cable to the accessory cable connector. NOTE: The accessory-cable emergency connector is shipped with a shorting plug installed. The headset connector is also shipped with a shorting plug installed. The plugs must remain in if an emergency switch and/or headset is not used. If an emergency switch and/or headset is used, remove the shorting plug(s) and discard. Install the mounting plate in position on top of the cables installed above. Take care not to damage or pinch the cables when securing the mounting plate in position. 4. NOTE: At this point, the control-head cable plug should be located at the forward end of the enclosure, and the power-cable, speaker-cable, and accessory-cable plugs should be located at the rear of the enclosure. 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver and Cabling Installation 5-23 ACCESSORY CABLE EMERGENCY AND EXTERNAL ALARM CONNETOR TRANSCEIVER POWER CABLE ACCESSORY CABLE CONTROL CABLE

(CAN) ACCESSORY CABLE HEADSET CONNECTOR HEADSET SPORTING PLUG EMERGENCY CABLE SHORTING PLUG IGNITION SENSE

(ACC) CONTROL HEAD GROUND (BLACK) CONTROL HEAD POWER (RED) CONTROL HEAD POWER FUSE Figure 5-16. Installing Cables 5.11.2 Installing the Transceiver Install the transceiver in the weather-resistant enclosure as follows (see Figure 5-17). NOTE: For new or existing installations, use only the APX mobile trunnion (kit number: HLN7002_). Install the mounting trunnion and loose ends of the four ground straps to the radio-mounting plate, using four screws, flat washers, and external-tooth lock washers (see Figure 5-17). The ground straps must be sandwiched between the flat washers and lock washers. The lock washer must be against the trunnion. The flat washer must be under the screw head. 1. 2. Attach the transceiver to the mounting trunnion and secure with the two screws provided. 3. Connect the control cable to the front of the transceiver. Ensure the control-cable connector screws are tightened. 4. Attach the accessory connector to the transceiver. Plug in the power connector. 5. Install the grommet around the cables and push the grommet into the cable-routing hole of the weather-resistant enclosure. 6878215A01 5-24 Motorcycle Radio Installation Transceiver and Cabling Installation 15 3 2 18 17 16 4 1 2 8 9 6 7 10 13 12 14 11 6 Figure 5-17. Installing the Transceiver Table 5-1. Transceiver Installation Parts List Item No. Description Item No. Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Lock washer Flat washer (8 used) Screw Screw Grommet Screw Lock catch Radio mounting plate Bottom housing 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Ground shield plane Top cover Gasket Hinge Enclosure mounts Transceiver Screw Trunnion External tooth lock washer (8 used) 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the Emergency Switch Option 5-25 5.12 Installing the Emergency Switch Option Use the two-conductor, green/black cable which has as one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W688 Motorcycle Emergency Push Button. Disconnect the emergency switch shorting plug from the accessory cable. Replace the shorting wire of the shorting plug with the terminated end of the green/black emergency cable. Reconnect the plug to the accessory cable. 5.13 Installing the External Alarm Relay Option The motorcycle radio is offered with only one optional relay connection. If both horn and lights are required, wire a second relay coil parallel to the first relay. Use the two-conductor green/black cable which has one end terminated with two contacts (part number 3080221P02) and which is supplied with this W116 Motorcycle Alarm Relay Option. Insert the contacts into positions 3 and 4 of the emergency shorting plug of the accessory cable. Refer to Figure 5-23. 5.14 Installing the Headset Accessory A six-position connector on the accessory cable has been made available for connecting a headset accessory. Headset manufacturers should be consulted for compatibility with the motorcycle radio prior to purchase and installation of the headset. To install, disconnect the headset shorting plug. Remove the headset shorting wire from the headset shorting plug. Terminate the contacts provided to the applicable wires of the headset cable. Insert the terminated wires into the headset shorting plug per the contact positions illustrated in the typical headset schematic found in this manual. Reconnect the terminated headset shorting plug to the accessory cable. When upgrading from an APX mobile radio, the existing headset cable HLN6890 requires these two pins to be swapped (see Figure 5-18). The other motorcycle headset cable with this pin change is 3080010R04. 20 13 26 7 Remove from Pin 1

(VI P OU T 1 ) Insert into Pin 22

(Monitor) J2, BACK OF RADIO 21 14 8 1 Rework for Handlebar HUB operation when upgrading existing cable HLN6890. SPK +

GND AUX_PTT 1 3 5

(Female-Pins) 2 4 6 SPK -

VIP OUT 1 AUX_MIC Figure 5-18. Motorcycle Wiring Harness Rework 6878215A01 5-26 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield 5.15 Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield Install the sunshield (part number NNTN7279_) to the O5 control head as follows. 1. Assemble the sunshield to the remote mount trunnion as shown in Figure 5-19. The same process can be used for the motorcycle trunnion. Figure 5-19. Remote Mount Trunnion with Sunshield 2. Position the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-20 and remove the Velcro adhesive backing. Velcro Adhesive Backing Figure 5-20. Position the Sunshield 6878215A01 Motorcycle Radio Installation Installing the O5 Control Head Sunshield 5-27 3. Slide the control head onto the trunnion while aligning the edge of the control head with the edge of the sunshield as shown in Figure 5-21. Make sure the Velcro properly adheres to the control head. Figure 5-21. Slide the Control Head onto Trunnion 4. Position control head as desired and install screws as shown in Figure 5-22. Figure 5-22. Position Control Head as Desired 6878215A01 5-28 5.16 Horn/Lights Wiring Motorcycle Radio Installation 5.17 Emergency Switch Wiring Figure 5-23. Horn/Lights Wiring Diagram Figure 5-24. Emergency Switch Wiring Diagram

!

!

W A R N I N G Motorcycle products must have pins 1 and 2 connected together to allow the radio to power down. Opening this connection by REMOVING the emergency shorting plug, or pressing the emergency switch, will turn on the radio. Failure to maintain a normally-closed path could drain the vehicle battery if left unchecked. EMERGENCY-equipped radios are capable of TRANSMITTING without warning. 6878215A01 Chapter 6 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 6.1 6.1.1 O2 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounthing trunnion. Plug the radios CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-30 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. NOTE: Connector-protective covers are provided with the radio. They should be used for added environmental robustness.



Be sure the control head and microphone PTT switches are OFF. Install the 15-amp fuse in the radio power cable fuseholder and the 3- or 4-amp fuse(s) in the ignition sense cable fuseholder(s).



Turn the radio ON at the control head and verify proper operation of all controls and indicators. Radio operation in some installations require turning on the ignition sense. Perform a complete operational check of the radio.



Dress the control and power cables out of the way to prevent damage (pull any excess cable into the trunk area) securing with clamps and tie wraps where necessary. 6.1.2 O3 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Unplug the CAN coiled cable connector on the Transceiver Interface. Plug in the connector again. A click sound should be heard. Ensure location of CAN connector is correct 

(i.e. J800L or J800R) on the transceiver interface. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector of either J2 or J626 

(refer cabling diagram for detail). 6.1.3 O5 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-30 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 6-2 Finishing the Installation Cable Connection 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.4 O7 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-30 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the lower left corner of the control head front panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. 6.1.5 O9 Control Head Perform the following if it has not been previously done:

1. Remove the control head from its mounting trunnion. Plug the radio's CAN cable into the proper location on the back of the control head (see Figure 2-29 and Figure 2-31 in Chapter 2). The connectors click when snapped into place. The control head model can have the microphone plugged into the CGAI connection on the control head back panel. 2. Connect the plug from the speaker lead to the mating connector coming out of the power cable. 3. Plug the VIP connector into the correct location on the back of the control head. 4. Connect the CAN cable to the proper location on the transceiver. October 2012 6878215A01 Finishing the Installation Dust Cover Installation 6-3 6.2 Dust Cover Installation To help protect and ensure debris does not effect or damage your unused connectors, please use the provided dust covers. Refer to Figure 6-1 to determine which cover is for which connector. A: 1515047C01 B: 1515048C01 C: 1515049C01 D: 7575262A01 E: 1575640C01 F: 1515327H02 G: 1575693A01 B D A A F Control Head A B C Control Head (Rear) G E D Mid Power Tanapa (Remote Front) Mid Power Tanapa (Rear) G D E APX 2500/APX 4500 Mid Power Tanapa (Rear) E C B A G High Power Tanapa (Remote Front) High Power Tanapa (Rear) Figure 6-1. Dust Cover Installation Locations 6878215A01 October 2012 6-4 Finishing the Installation Miscellaneous Information NOTE: Parts B and F require inserting then turning approximately 1/3 turn using a coin as a tool until it contacts the stop.



Parts C and/or D shall be installed onto DB25 accessory cable assembly when the corresponding cable assembly connections are not in use.



Part G is not used on single band transceivers. 6.3 Miscellaneous Information On the mid power and 100W radios, there are rubber port plug which seals an opening which is used for a future antenna connection. On the mid power, the port plug is located at the bottom of the radio behind the control head or TIB. On the high power, the port plug is located at the TIB. These plugs are critical to the sealing of the radio and should not be removed unless to replace it due to damage or to install the future antenna connector. Removal of the port plug in any other situation would create a leak path into the radio. October 2012 6878215A01 Chapter 7 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting In this section are Motorola recommended vehicle installation practices that can address or prevent many issues, including:

Radio circuit damage due to over voltage condition Radio/Accessories "lock up"

Radio/Accessories change state/lock-up when radio PTT is depressed Radio powers up in the FL 01/90 state (general communication error code) Radio intermittently resets Radio loses secure key Transmit audio distortion on motorcycle radio when engine is running Keypad buttons become inoperative for motorcycle radios when engine is running Alternator whine present when transmitting with engine running Radio/Accessories turn themselves on/off 7.1 Check Wiring of Ignition and Radio Ignition Sensing If it is required to turn the radio on and off via the ignition sense switch, in addition to the control heads on/off switch, connect the ignition sense lead to the accessory terminal from the ignition switch (usually in the vehicles fuse panel under accessory or radio). NOTE: Motorola recommends protecting or isolating the radios ignition sense input from voltage spikes in excess of +/- 40VDC. Such spikes can be hundreds of volts in amplitude and are common in larger vehicles (utility trucks, buses and etc.), especially when the source is common to a solenoid coil. A triggerable oscilloscope is required to determine the existence of such spikes as most voltmeters cannot measure in short duration (< 1 msec). If the condition of the intended ignition sense source is unknown, Motorola recommends isolating the source from the radio with a relay or the use of a suppression diode wired between the source and ground. Any high current suppression diode (i.e. MR2535) with a breakdown voltage of between 18 and 40 volts will suffice. A suitable diode kit is available from Motorola parts, kit number HLN6325_. If it is required to have the radio power up only via the control heads on/off switch, then connect the ignition sense lead directly to the positive terminal of the battery. This will mean the ignition sense will always be ignored and a re-wiring will be necessary in the future if the operator chooses any ignition sense CPS setting. 7-2 7.2 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Check Physical Installation of Radio Ground and Radio Accessory Wiring Take care to scrape away paint on the chassis at the place where the ground connection is to be made, and try to keep the ground lead as short as possible. Verify that the A+ lead (red) is connected directly to the positive terminal of the battery and the ground lead (black) is connected to the vehicles chassis using as short of a length of wire as is practical. For vehicles that have other types of electronic equipment installed (lights, flashers, computers siren/PA and etc.), use a separate ground for the mobile radio equipment. Make sure that the mobile radio antenna is the minimum required distance (three feet) from the mobile radio equipment to prevent radio frequency interference (RFI) from interfering with the radio and/or accessories. Do not coil up any excess length of the A+ (red) lead. Doing this may cause a large transient voltage to be produced when there is a high current drain (e.g. during transmit). This could cause the radio to reset when the push-to-talk (PTT) is depressed. For motorcycle mounted radios, make sure that the antenna ground connection is solid. An intermittent ground connection can cause the transmission to be distorted when the motorcycles engine is running. Do not coil up any excessive length of antenna cable, if possible. It may affect the radios receive performance. If an extra length of cable is used to extend the microphone, make sure the added capacitance does not interfere with the operation of the radio. 7.3 Improve the Electrical Quality of the Power and Ignition Lines Use a relay to isolate the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC) from the radios ignition sense point. Control this relay from the vehicles ignition switch point (ACC). Supply a cleaner voltage from the positive terminal of the battery into the relay, which will now be attached to the radios ignition sense point. Now the ACC line toggles the relay, instead of directly toggling the radios ignition sense line. Install a Power Line Filter between the A+ lead and the positive terminal of the battery. This is intended to filter the battery power applied to the transmitter power amplifiers. Pay extra caution to this because the series filter will introduce a negative spike when the radio transmits that may cause problems with radio operation. Lock-up issues have been seen with the dual control head MCS 2000 configuration. For vehicles that use electromechanical relays to control external devices (lights, motors, switch boxes and etc.), these relay circuits should be isolated as best as possible from the mobile radio equipment. Also, diode suppression should be used across the relay contacts to minimize the noise produced by the collapsing magnetic field. If the ignition sense switch is to be used, make sure that there is not a large voltage drop between the A+ point (usually the positive terminal of the battery) and the ignition sense point. In general, the voltage difference between these two points, should not be greater than 1.5 volts when all accessories/air-conditioner, etc. are turned on. Refer to the Basic Service Manual for specifications for minimum and maximum voltage levels. Typical battery voltage levels are 13.6V +/- 20%. 6878215A01 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas 7-3 7.4 Minimize the Effect of Poorly Grounded Antennas For vehicles with high power (100W) radios that use glass mount antennas, care must be taken to keep the radio and antenna cable as far as possible from the radiating element of the antenna. If a sufficient distance is not maintained, the glass mount antennas lack of a proper ground plane may cause the radios transmit signal to interfere with itself and cause a reset. To minimize this effect, it may be necessary to install ferrite beads on the antenna cable to protect the radio from this interference. 7.5 Jump-Start the Vehicle

!

C a u t i o n Do not jump-start vehicle with radio power or ignition sense cables connected. Damage to the radio and/or accessories may result. Jump-starting a motorcycle can crank 300+ volts through the vehicles charging system and these transients can damage electrical equipment. The state of your radio prior to needing a jump-start may be unknown, and the radio may attempt to return to its last state (radio ON), when doing a jump-start. Therefore, Motorola recommends the following steps be taken before jump-starting any vehicle containing a radio. 1. Locate the ignition sense line (thin yellow wire or thin red wire, depending on dash mount or remote mount installation) and the main power leads (thick red wire) near the battery positive terminal. NOTE: These lines are fused. In the event these lines are not fused (add the appropriate fuse in line) use whatever tools necessary to physically disconnect the ignition sense and power lines from the battery terminal.



Make sure that the disconnected lines are not in the way of moving motorcycle parts or interfering with the motorcycle operation in any way. 2. Open up the fuse holders and remove the fuses out of the kits. 3. Re-tighten the fuse holders but without the fuses to insure that ignition sense and power lines do not interfere with moving motorcycle parts. 4. Proceed with the jump-start routine as described by your vehicle owners manual. 5. Once the jump-start process is complete, re-install the fuses into their holders. 7.6 Eliminate Noise/Howling from PA Speaker 1. Refer to Section 2.1.1 for recommended methods of installation available for the mobile 

two-way radio, with accessories placed to the vehicle as desired. 2. Refer to Figure 2-16 and Figure for the wiring diagrams for the recommended configurations. 3. Refer to the Siren/PA User Manual (part number 6881093C18) for further details on lowering the wattage. 6878215A01 7-4 Best Practices: Installation & Troubleshooting Notes 6878215A01 Appendix A Replacement Parts Ordering A.1 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information, the complete identification number should be included. This applies to all components, kits, and chassis. If the component part number is not known, the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part, and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it. The ASTRO APX Mobile Radio Basic Service Manual (Motorola publication part number 6875964M01) includes complete parts lists and part numbers. A.2 Motorola Online Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at https://www.motorola.com/businessonline To register for online access:

Domestic customers: please call 800-814-0601 (U.S. and Canada). International customers: please go to https://www.motorola.com/businessonline and click on Sign Up Now. A.3 Mail Orders Send written orders to the following addresses:

Replacement Parts/

Test Equipment/Manuals/

Crystal Service Items:

Motorola Inc. Radio Products and Services Division*

Attention: Order Processing 2200 Galvin Drive Elgin, IL 60123 U.S.A. Federal Government Orders:

International Orders:

Motorola Inc. U.S. Federal Government Markets Division Attention: Order Processing 7230 Parkway Drive Landover, MD 21076 U.S.A. Motorola Inc. Radio Products and Services Division*

Attention: Order Processing 2200 Galvin Drive Elgin, IL 60123 U.S.A. A-2 A.4 A.5 Replacement Parts Ordering Telephone Orders Telephone Orders Radio Products and Services Division*

(United States and Canada)

7:00 AM to 7:00 PM (Central Standard Time)

Monday through Friday (Chicago, U.S.A.)

1-800-422-4210

1-847-538-8023 (International Orders) U.S. Federal Government Markets Division (USFGMD)

1-800-826-1913 Federal Government Parts - Credit Cards Only

8:30 AM to 5:00 PM (Eastern Standard Time) Fax Orders Radio Products and Services Division*

(United States and Canada)

1-800-622-6210

1-847-576-3023 (International) USFGMD

(Federal Government Orders)

1-800-526-8641 (For Parts and Equipment Purchase Orders) A.6 Parts Identification Radio Products and Services Division*

(United States and Canada)

1-800-422-4210, menu 3 A.7 Product Customer Service Customer Response Center

(Non-technical Issues)

1-800-247-2346

FAX:1-800-247-2347

*The Radio Products and Services Division (RPSD) was formerly known as the Customer Care and Services Division (CCSD) and/or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division (AAD). A.8 Asia Pacific Service Centers Motorola Solutions Singapore Pte. Ltd. c/o Azure Engineering 49 Jalan Pemimpin

#03-11 APS Industrial Building Singapore 577203 TEL: (+65) 63526383 Motorola Solutions Philippines, Inc. Unit 2102, One Global Place Building 5th Ave., Bonifacio Global City Taguig, Philippines 1634 TEL: (+632) 8587500 FAX: (+632) 8410681 Motorola Solutions Sdn. Bhd. Level 14, Persoft Tower No. 68, Pesiaran Tropicana 47410 Petaling Jaya Selangor Darul Ehsan Malaysia TEL: (+603) 78090000 Motorola Solutions (Thailand) Ltd. 142 Two Pacific Place Suite 2201 3220 Sukhumvit Road Klongtoey Bangkok 10110 TEL: (+662) 6532220 FAX: (+668) 2545922 PT. Motorola Solutions Indonesia 30th Floor, Gedung BRI II, Suite 3001 Jl. Jend. Sudirman Kav. 44-46 Jakarta 10210 Indonesia TEL: (62-21) 30435239 6878215A01 Index Index Numerics 100W radios antenna connection ............................................. 2-40 configurations ........................................................ 1-9 installation ........................................................... 2-24 lock ...................................................................... 2-32 trunnions ............................................................. 2-20 A accessories connector assembly ..................................... 4-1, 4-10 assembly ......................................................... 4-11 disassembly ..................................................... 4-10 exploded view .................................................. 4-11 connector pins ....................................................... 4-8 headset ........................................................ 5-2, 5-25 installing dash mount ........................................................ 4-1 horn relay ........................................................... 4-4 light relay ........................................................... 4-4 remote mount .................................................... 4-9 antenna ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, antenna connection ........................................................... 2-40 diagrams ....................................................2-40, 2-41 installing .....................................................2-38, 5-18 motorcycle ............................................................. 5-2 mounting ............................................................. 2-38 site ....................................................................... 2-38 B base stations ........................................................... 1-14 black lead ..............................................2-33, 5-19, 5-25 C cables ................................................5-3, 5-4, 5-5, 5-22 accessory .....................................4-1, 4-2, 5-19, 5-25 adapter ................................................................ 4-12 antenna ......................................................2-19, 2-40 battery ................................................................. 4-10 connection ...................................................... 6-1, 7-1 diagrams ..................................2-25, 2-40, 5-19, 5-23 emergency .......................................................... 5-25 excess ................................................................. 5-22 ignition ................................................................. 4-10 microphone ..................................................5-2, 5-12 motorcycle control head ...............5-2, 5-9, 5-11, 5-19 motorcycle control head, installing ...................... 5-18 motorcycle transceiver ........................................ 5-22 power .........................................................2-33, 5-19 remote mount ...................................................... 2-24 routing ................................................................. 5-19 speaker ...............................................5-2, 5-14, 5-19 configurations 100W radios .......................................................... 1-9 dash mount ........................................................... 1-5 motorcycle ........................................................... 1-14 multi control ......................................................... 1-13 remote mount ........................................................ 1-7 control head .............................................. 2-29, 4-6, 4-8 cabling ................................................................. 2-24 diagrams ........................................... 2-25, 2-26, 2-27 multi .................................................................... 1-13 remote mount ........................................................ 1-7 control stations ....................................................... 1-14 D dash mount accessories installations ....................................... 4-1 configuration ......................................................... 1-5 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 radio dimensions ..............................1-1, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4 trunnion ............................................................... 2-21 E emergency footswitch ............................................... 4-1 emergency pushbutton ............................................. 4-1 emergency switch installing .............................................................. 5-25 wiring ................................................................... 5-28 external alarm installing .............................................................. 5-25 see also Horn relay or Light relay F footswitch, emergency .............................................. 4-1 G green lead ............................................................... 5-25 H horn relay ..................................4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 5-25, 5-28 I ignition installation cable ................................................................... 4-10 wire ..................................................................... 5-19 wire, for motorcycle ............................................... 5-2 examples ............................................................... 2-2 important hints ....................................................... 5-4 order of .................................................................. 5-5 J J2 ....................................................................... 4-7, 4-8 Index-2 L leads black ..................................................2-33, 5-19, 5-25 green ................................................................... 5-25 light relay ................................. 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 5-25, 5-28 locking kit, installing ................................................ 2-32 pin ground ................................................................... 4-3 SW B+ ..................................................... 4-4, 4-7, 4-8 VIP in .................................................................... 4-8 VIP out ........................................................... 4-4, 4-7 pushbutton, emergency ............................................ 4-1 M microphone ........................................................ 5-2, 5-4 hang-up clip, installing ......................................... 5-14 hang-up clip, standard ..................2-46, 5-5, 5-9, 5-11 mounting ............................................................... 5-4 motorcycle antenna ................................................................. 5-2 configuration ........................................................ 1-14 control head cable ................................................. 5-2 display unit ............................................................ 5-1 external speaker .................................................... 5-2 headset ................................................................. 5-2 ignition wire ........................................................... 5-2 installation ............................................................. 5-3 antenna ............................................................ 5-18 cables .............................................................. 5-18 cabling ............................................................. 5-22 control head ....................................................... 5-7 emergency switch ...................................5-25, 5-28 external alarm .................................................. 5-25 fuel tank console ..............................5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar .................................................. 5-8, 5-11 headset ............................................................ 5-25 horn/lights wiring .............................................. 5-28 microphone hang-up clip ................................. 5-14 speaker ..................................................... 5-7, 5-14 transceiver ..............................................5-22, 5-24 universal mounting plate .................................... 5-6 weather-resistant enclosure ............................. 5-21 microphone ........................................................... 5-2 transceiver ............................................................. 5-1 mounting configurations .......................................... 2-19 dash ............................................................. 1-5, 2-21 motorcycle ........................................................... 1-14 multi control ......................................................... 1-13 remote .......................................................... 1-7, 2-23 mounting plate, universal ............................5-1, 5-3, 5-5 installing ................................................................ 5-6 mounting, antenna restrictions ........................................................... 2-38 roof top ................................................................ 2-38 trunk lid ................................................................ 2-38 multi control configuration ........................................................ 1-13 O ordering replacement parts .......................................A-1 P parts, ordering replacement ......................................A-1 R relays horn .......................................4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 5-25, 5-28 light .......................................4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 5-25, 5-28 remote mount accessory installations .......................................... 4-9 cabling ................................................................. 2-24 configuration ......................................................... 1-7 control cable installation ...................................... 2-29 installation ............................................................. 2-8 installation examples ............................................. 2-2 trunnion ............................................................... 2-23 replacement parts, ordering ...................................... A-1 S speaker ..................................................................... 5-5 cable, see Cables, speaker external ................................................................. 5-2 fuel tank console installation ............... 5-9, 5-10, 5-12 handlebar installation .......................... 5-8, 5-11, 5-12 installing ................................................ 5-7, 5-9, 5-14 mounting ............................................................. 2-43 T tools, required ......................................................... 1-14 trunnion ................................................................... 2-25 100W radios ........................................................ 2-20 bracket for speaker ............................................. 2-43 dash mount ......................................................... 2-21 diagrams ............................................................. 2-25 locking kit ............................................................ 2-32 motorcycle installation ......................................... 5-23 mounting bracket ................................................ 2-21 orientation ........................................................... 2-20 remote mount ............................................... 1-7, 2-23 transmission hump mounting .............................. 2-22 U universal mounting plate ............................. 5-1, 5-3, 5-5 installing ................................................................ 5-6 V VIP connector ....................................................... 4-2, 6-2 input connections .................................................. 4-8 output connections ................................................ 4-7 6878215A01 W wiring diagrams ......................................................... 2-3 Index-3 6878215A01 Index-4 Notes 6878215A01 Glossary Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to the ASTRO radio. Term analog band CPS Customer Programming Software default D.E.K digital EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory FCC firmware frequency kHz kilohertz MCU MHz Definition Refers to a continuously variable signal or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals. See also digital. Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose. See Customer Programming Software. Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio. A pre-defined set of parameters. Direct Entry Keyboard. Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set; most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals. See also analog. See Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory. A special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. An EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. Federal Communications Commission. Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in a subscriber radio. This type of code is typically resident in non-volatile memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM. Number of times a complete electromagnetic-wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time (usually one second). See kilohertz. One thousand cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. See microcontroller unit. See Megahertz. Glossary-2 Term Megahertz microcontroller unit PA paging PTT Publication Manual Revision Push-to-Talk radio frequency RAM random access memory receiver registers RESET RF RX signal software time-out timer TOT transceiver transmitter Definition One million cycles per second. Used especially as a radio-frequency unit. Also written as C. A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components, as well as communications and programming components and peripherals. Power amplifier. One-way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message. See Push-to-Talk. A publication that provides supplemental information for its parent publication before it is revised and reissued. The switch or button that causes the radio to transmit when pressed. When the PTT switch or button is released, the unit returns to standby or receive operation. The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light (approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz). See random access memory. A type of computer memory that can be accessed randomly; that is, any byte of memory can be accessed without touching the preceding bytes. Electronic device that amplifies RF signals. A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier, amplifies it, and converts it back to the original sound waves. Short-term data-storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC. Reset line: an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution. See radio frequency. Receive. An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave. Computer programs, procedures, rules, documentation, and data pertaining to the operation of a system. A timer that limits the length of a transmission. See time-out timer. Transmitter-receiver. A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals. Also abbreviated as XCVR. Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal, modulates the signal, and then radiates it into space. 6878215A01 Glossary-3 Term Definition TX UHF Universal Serial Bus USB VHF Transmit. Ultra-High Frequency. An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 12 Mbps. See Universal Serial Bus. Very-High Frequency. 6878215A01 Glossary-4 Notes 6878215A01 Motorola Solutions, Inc. 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg, Illinois 60196 U.S.A. MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 2009 2012 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved. October 2012.

*6878215a01*

6878215A01-F